2009-2015 Skoda Superb SUV Using the system User Manual
MyCarUserManual.com
USER MANUALS FOR EVERY MAKE & MODEL

Using the system for Your Skoda Superb SUV Second Generation (2009-2015)

Cockpit  
9
Using the system  
Cockpit  
18  
19  
Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
198  
Overview  
Control dial for the instrument lighting and control dial for the  
headlight beam range regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
59, 59  
93  
110  
160  
110  
174  
28  
This overview will help you to quickly familiarise yourself with the  
displays and the control elements.  
20  
21  
Storage compartment on the driver's side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Lever for adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
driver's knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TCS switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Depending on equipment fitted:  
1
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Lever for the multi-functional switch:  
47  
35  
100  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
2
3
4
Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight flasher . .  
Speed regulating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
60  
122  
Operating controls for the air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Operating controls for Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
100  
103  
5
Steering wheel:  
with horn  
27  
Depending on equipment fitted:  
with driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
with controls for radio, radio navigation system and phone . . . . . .  
158  
132  
10  
Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Selector lever (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
113  
126  
165  
118  
117  
6
7
Instrument cluster: Instruments and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Lever for the multi-functional switch:  
28  
29  
30  
31  
Indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag . . . . . . .  
Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Front and rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Depending on equipment fitted:  
Multi-functional indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
14  
66  
8
9
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Control dial for heating on the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Switch for hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Control dial for heating on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Depending on equipment fitted:  
100  
78  
60  
78  
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
90  
93  
10  
11  
Note  
Vehicles with a factory-fitted radio or radio navigation system are supplied  
with separate instructions for operating such equipment.  
12  
Radio  
The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of some items  
Radio navigation system  
on right-hand drive models may differ from that shown in ⇒ꢀfig. 1. The symbols on  
13  
14  
15  
Storage compartment on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Switch for the front passenger airbag (in front passenger storage  
compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
92  
158  
the controls and switches are the same as for left-hand drive models.  
165  
70  
54  
16  
17  
Electric exterior mirror adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
10 Instruments and warning lights  
Instruments and warning lights  
General information  
WARNING  
Concentrate fully at all times on your steering! As the driver you are fully  
responsible for road safety.  
Operate the controls in the instrument cluster never while driving, but only  
when the vehicle is stationary!  
Overview of the instrument cluster  
Fig. 2 Instrument cluster  
1
3
Engine revolutions counter ⇒ꢀpage 11  
Speedometer ⇒ꢀpage 11  
Button for display mode:  
2
Set hours/minutes  
Activating/deactivating the second speed in mph or km/h  
Service interval - Display of the remaining number of days, kilometres or  
1)  
£
miles to the next Inspection Service/Reset  
1)  
Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.  
Instruments and warning lights 11  
4
5
Coolant temperature gauge ⇒ꢀpage 11  
Display:  
Coolant temperature gauge  
with counter for distance driven ⇒ꢀpage 12  
with Service Interval Display ⇒ꢀpage 12  
with digital clock ⇒ꢀpage 13  
with Multi-functional display ⇒ꢀpage 14  
with Information display⇒ꢀpage 17  
4
The coolant temperature gauge  
switched on.  
⇒ꢀfig. 2 operates only when the ignition is  
Please pay attention to the following guidelines regarding temperature ranges in  
order to avoid damage to the engine:  
Cold range  
6
7
Fuel gauge ⇒ꢀpage 11  
Button for:  
If the pointer is in the left-hand area of the scale it means that the engine has not  
yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid running at high engine speeds, at  
full throttle and at severe engine loads.  
Reset trip counter for distance driven  
Resetting Service Interval Display  
Set hours/minutes  
The operating range  
Activate/deactivate display mode  
The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves  
into the mid-range of the scale. The pointer may also move further to the right at  
high engine loads and high outside temperatures. This is not critical provided the  
warning symbol in the instrument cluster does not flash.  
Engine revolutions counter  
If the symbol in the instrument cluster flashes it means that either the coolant  
temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. Please refer to the guide-  
lines ⇒ꢀpage 27, Coolant temperature/ Coolant quantity .  
1
The red zone of the rev counter scale  
⇒ꢀfig. 2 indicates the range in which the  
engine control unit begins to limit the engine speed. The engine control unit re-  
stricts the engine speed to a steady limit value.  
Shift into the next higher gear or select the selector lever position D of the auto-  
matic gearbox before reaching the red zone of the rev counter scale.  
WARNING  
Pay attention to the warning notes ⇒ꢀpage 198, Working in the engine com-  
Avoid high engine speeds during the driving time and before the engine has been  
warmed up to operating temperature ⇒ꢀpage 180.  
partment before opening the bonnet and inspecting the coolant level.  
CAUTION  
For the sake of the environment  
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the fresh air inlet  
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant. There is then a risk of the engine  
overheating at high outside temperatures and high engine loads!  
Shifting to a higher gear in good time helps to reduce the fuel consumption, mini-  
mises operating noise levels, protects the environment and contributes to a lon-  
ger life and reliability of the engine.  
Fuel gauge  
Speedometer  
6
The fuel gauge  
⇒ꢀfig. 2 only operates when the ignition is switched on.  
Warning against excessive speeds  
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres. The warning symbol in the in-  
strument cluster lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve marking. There  
are now about 10.5 litres of fuel remaining in the tank. This symbol is a reminder  
for you, that you must refuel.  
An acoustic warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 kilo-  
metres per hour. The acoustic warning signal will switch off again when the vehi-  
cle speed goes below this speed limit.  
£
The following is displayed in the information display:  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
12 Instruments and warning lights  
Please refuel! (Please refuel!)  
Note  
If vehicles which are fitted with the information display the display of the second  
speed is activated in mph or km/h, this driving speed is indicated instead of the  
counter for the total distance driven.  
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.  
CAUTION  
Never run the fuel tank completely empty! An irregular supply of fuel can lead to  
irregular engine running. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and dam-  
age the catalytic converter.  
Service reminder indicator  
Note  
After filling up, it can occur that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous curves,  
braking, driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indicates ap-  
prox. a fraction less. When stopping or during less dynamic driving, the correct fuel  
supply quantity is indicated. This effect is not a fault.  
Counter for distance driven  
The distance which you have driven with your vehicle is shown in kilometres (km).  
In some countries the measuring unit “mile” is used.  
Fig. 3 Service Interval Display: Note  
Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, the text can differ on the  
display.  
Reset button  
7
If you hold the reset button  
counter is set back to zero.  
⇒ꢀpage 10 pressed for about 1 second, the trip  
Service Interval Display  
Before the next service interval a key symbol and the remaining kilometres are  
indicated after switching on the ignition ⇒ꢀfig. 3. At the same time, a display ap-  
pears regarding the remaining days until the next service interval.  
Trip counter for distance driven  
The trip counter indicates the distance which you have driven since this counter  
was last reset - in steps of 100 metres or 1/10 of a mile.  
The following is displayed in the information display:  
Counter for distance driven  
Service after ... km or... days. (Service after ... km or ... days.)  
The counter for distance driven indicates the total distance in kilometers or miles  
which the vehicle has been driven.  
The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km. or days  
until the service due date is reached.  
Fault display  
A flashing key symbol and the text Service appears in the display for 20 sec-  
onds as soon as the due date for the service is reached.  
If there is a fault in the instrument cluster Error will appear continuously in the  
display. Have the fault rectified as soon as possible by a specialist workshop.  
The following is displayed in the information display:  
Service now! (Service now!)  
WARNING  
Display regarding the distance and days until the following service interval  
Never seek to adjust the trip counter for distance driven while driving for  
safety reasons!  
3
You can use the button  
to display the remaining distance driven and the days  
£
until the next service interval ⇒ꢀpage 10.  
Instruments and warning lights 13  
A key symbol and a display regarding the remaining kilometers appear for 10  
second in the display. At the same time, a display appears regarding the remaining  
days until the next service interval.  
The data displayed is the same after resetting the display with flexible service  
intervals (QG1) is displayed as that for a vehicle with fixed service intervals (QG2).  
We therefore recommend having the Service Interval Display reset only by an au-  
thorised ŠKODA Service Partner who is familiar with the procedure for resetting  
the display with a vehicle system tester.  
On vehicles which are equipped with an information display, you can call up this  
display in the menu Settings ⇒ꢀpage 19.  
The following will be displayed in the information display for 10 seconds:  
Please refer to the brochure Service schedule for extensive information about  
the service intervals.  
Service after ... km or... days. (Service after ... km or ... days.)  
Resetting Service Interval Display  
Digital clock  
It is only possible to reset the Service Interval Display, if a service message or at  
least a pre-warning is shown on the display of the instrument cluster.  
3
7
The time is set with the buttons  
and  
⇒ꢀfig. 2.  
We recommend having this resetting performed by a specialist garage.  
The specialist garage:  
3
Select the display which you wish to change with the button  
and carry out the  
7
change with the button  
.
On vehicles which are fitted with the information display, it is possible to set the  
time in the menu Time ⇒ꢀpage 19.  
resets the memory of the display after the appropriate inspection,  
makes an entry in the Service schedule,  
affix the sticker with the entry of the following service interval to the side of  
WARNING  
the dash panel on the driver's side.  
The clock should not be adjusted while driving for safety reasons but only  
when the vehicle is stationary!  
7
Reset the service interval displays by using the reset button  
trip counter.  
⇒ꢀpage 10 on the  
On vehicles which are equipped with an information display, you can call up this  
display in the menu Settings ⇒ꢀpage 19.  
Shift recommendation for changing gears  
CAUTION  
We recommend that you do not reset the Service Interval Display yourself other-  
wise this can result in the service interval display being incorrectly set, which may  
also result in problems with operation of your vehicle.  
Note  
Never reset the display between service intervals otherwise this may result in  
incorrect readouts.  
information is retained in the Service Interval Display also after the battery of  
the vehicle is disconnected.  
If the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair, the correct values must  
Fig. 4 Recommendation for changing  
gears  
A
be entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display. This work is carried out  
by a specialist garage.  
An information for the engaged gear  
strument cluster.  
⇒ꢀfig. 4 is shown in the display of the in-  
In order to minimise the fuel consumption, a recommendation for shifting into an-  
other gear is indicated in the display.  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
14 Instruments and warning lights  
B
If the control unit recognises that it is appropriate to change the gear, an arrow  
Memory  
is shown in the display. The arrow points up or down, depending on whether it is  
recommended to shift into a higher or lower gear.  
At the same time, the recommended gear is indicated instead of the currently en-  
A
gaged gear  
.
Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer)  
Introduction  
Fig. 5 Multi-functional indicator  
The multi-functional indicator appears in the display ⇒ꢀfig. 5 or in the information  
display ⇒ꢀpage 17 depending on the equipment fitted to your vehicle.  
The multi-functional indicator is equipped with two automatic memories. The se-  
lected memory is displayed in the middle of the display field ⇒ꢀfig. 5.  
The multi-functional indicator offers you a range of useful information.  
The data of the single-trip memory (memory 1) is shown if a 1 appears in the dis-  
play. A 2 shown in the display means that data relates to the total distance mem-  
ory (memory 2).  
The outside temperature  
Driving time  
⇒ꢀpage 15  
⇒ꢀpage 15  
⇒ꢀpage 16  
⇒ꢀpage 16  
⇒ꢀpage 16  
⇒ꢀpage 16  
⇒ꢀpage 16  
⇒ꢀpage 16  
⇒ꢀpage 17  
⇒ꢀpage 17  
Current fuel consumption  
Average fuel consumption  
Range  
B
Switching over the memory with the help of the button  
D
⇒ꢀfig. 6 on the wind-  
screen wiper lever or with the help of the button  
steering wheel.  
on the ⇒ꢀfig. 6 multifunction  
Distance driven  
Single-trip memory (memory 1)  
Average speed  
The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the igni-  
tion is switched on until it is switched off. New data will also flow into the calcula-  
tion of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after  
switching off the ignition. The memory will be is automatically erased, on the oth-  
er hand, if the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours.  
Current speed  
Oil temperature  
Warning against excessive speeds  
On vehicles which are fitted out with information display, it is possible to switch  
off the display of some information.  
Total-trip memory (memory 2)  
The total distance driven memory gathers data from any number of individual  
journeys up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes driving or 1 999 kilometres driv-  
en. 99 hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9 999 km driven in vehicles with an  
Information display. The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached  
and the calculation starts from anew.  
CAUTION  
Pull out the ignition key while having contact with the display (for example when  
cleaning) in order to prevent any damage.  
Note  
The total-trip memory will not, contrary to the single-trip memory, be deleted af-  
ter a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours.  
In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of  
measures.  
£
If the display of the second speed is activated in mph, the current speed is not  
indicated in km/h on the display.  
Instruments and warning lights 15  
Setting function to zero  
Note  
Select the memory you want.  
All information in the memory 1 and 2 is erased if the battery of the vehicle is dis-  
connected.  
B
D
Press the button  
or  
for more than 1 second.  
The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero with the button  
Operating with the buttons on the windshield wiper lever and on  
the multifunction steering wheel  
B
D
on the windshield wiper lever or with the button  
ing wheel:  
on the multifunction steer-  
average fuel consumption,  
distance driven,  
average speed,  
Driving time.  
You can only operate the multi-functional indicator when the ignition is switched  
on. After the ignition is switched on, the function displayed is the one which you  
last selected before switching off the ignition.  
Outside temperature  
Fig. 6 Multi-functional indicator: Controls on the windshield wiper lever/controls on the mul-  
tifunction steering wheel  
The outside temperature appears in the display when the ignition is switched on.  
If the outside temperature drops below +4 °C, a snow flake symbol (warning signal  
A
B
The rocker switch  
⇒ꢀfig. 6 and the button  
are located on the windshield  
for ice on the road) appears before the temperature indicator and a warning signal  
A
D
wiper lever. Switching over and resetting is performed with the handwheel  
⇒ꢀfig. 6 on the multifunction steering wheel.  
sounds. After pressing the rocker switch  
C
last is indicated.  
at the windshield wiper lever ⇒ꢀfig. 6  
or the button  
at the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ꢀfig. 6, the function shown  
Selecting the memory  
B
After briefly pressing the button  
D
on the windshield wiper lever or by briefly  
pressing the button  
desired memory.  
on the multifunction steering wheel, you can select the  
WARNING  
Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature dis-  
play that there is no ice on the road. Please note that black ice may also be  
present on the road surface even at temperatures around +4 °C - warning,  
drive with care!  
Selecting the functions with the help of the windshield wiper lever  
A
Press the top or bottom rocker switch  
for longer than 0.5 seconds. In this  
way, call up in sequence the individual functions of the multi-functional indica-  
tor.  
Driving time  
Selecting the functions with the help of the multifunction steering wheel  
C
By pressing the button , you can call up the menu of the multi-functional in-  
dicator.  
The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased, appears in  
the display. If you wish to measure the driving time as of a particular time, you  
B
must set the memory to zero at this moment in time by pressing the button  
D
on  
D
Turn the handwheel  
upwards or downwards. In this way, call up in se-  
the windshield wiper lever ⇒ꢀfig. 6 or the handwheel  
steering wheel ⇒ꢀfig. 6 for longer than 1 second.  
on the multifunction  
quence the individual functions of the multi-functional indicator.  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
16 Instruments and warning lights  
The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.  
99 hours and 59 minutes in vehicles with an Information display. The indicator is  
set back to null if this period is exceeded.  
The fuel consumption for the last 50 km is taken as a basis for calculating the  
range. If you drive in a more economical manner from this moment on, the range  
will be increased accordingly.  
If the memory is set to zero (after disconnecting the battery), the fuel consump-  
tion of 10 ltr./100 km is calculated for the range; afterwards the value is adapted  
accordingly to the style of driving.  
Current consumption  
The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres/100 km. This  
information can help you to adapt your style of driving to the fuel consumption  
you wish to achieve.  
Distance driven  
The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low  
speed.  
The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the display  
⇒ꢀpage 14. If you wish to measure the distance driven of a particular time, you  
B
must set the memory to zero at this moment in time by pressing the button  
D
on  
The indicated value will be updated every 0.5 seconds while you are driving.  
the windshield wiper lever ⇒ꢀfig. 6 or the handwheel  
steering wheel ⇒ꢀfig. 6.  
on the multifunction  
Average fuel consumption  
The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1 999 km or on vehicles with  
information display, it is 9 999 km. The indicator is set back to null if this period is  
exceeded.  
The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is shown in the  
display in litres/100 km ⇒ꢀpage 14. This information can help you to adapt your  
style of driving to the fuel consumption you wish to achieve.  
Average speed  
If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of  
time you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement using the  
The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in  
km/hour ⇒ꢀpage 14. If you wish to determine the average vehicle speed over a cer-  
tain period of time you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measure-  
B
B
D
button  
on the windshield wiper lever ⇒ꢀfig. 6 or with the handwheel  
on the  
multifunction steering wheel ⇒ꢀfig. 6 . A zero appears in the display for the first  
100 m you drive after erasing the memory.  
ment using the button  
D
on the windshield wiper lever ⇒ꢀfig. 6 or with the hand-  
The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.  
wheel  
on the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ꢀfig. 6 .  
A zero appears in the display for the first approx. 300 m you drive after erasing  
the memory.  
Note  
The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.  
The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.  
Range  
Current speed  
The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display. It indicates the dis-  
tance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the present level of fuel in the  
tank for the same style of driving.  
The current speed which is identical to the display of the speedometer, is indica-  
2
ted on the display  
⇒ꢀfig. 2.  
The readout is shown in steps of 10 km. After lighting up of the indicator light for  
the fuel reserve the display is shown in steps of 5 km.  
Instruments and warning lights 17  
Change or delete speed limit  
Oil temperature  
A
With the  
button on the multi-function windshield wiper lever or the hand-  
D
wheel  
on the multi-function steering wheel, choose the menu point Warn-  
If the oil temperature is lower than 50 °C or if a fault in the system for checking  
the oil temperature is present, three lines are displayed instead of the oil temper-  
ature.  
ing against excessive speeds.  
B
D
Press the button  
multifunction steering wheel to delete the speed limit.  
on the windshield wiper lever or the handwheel  
on the  
Warning against excessive speeds  
B
Press the button  
on the windshield wiper lever a second time or the hand-  
D
wheel  
on the multifunction steering wheel to activate the speed limit.  
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary  
If you exceed the set speed limit, an acoustic warning signal will sound as a warn-  
ing. At the same time the message Warning against excessive speeds appears  
with the set limit value.  
A
With the  
button on the multi-function steering wheel ⇒ꢀfig. 6 or the hand-  
on the multi-function steering wheel ⇒ꢀfig. 6 , choose the menu  
D
wheel  
point Warning against excessive speeds.  
The set speed limit remains stored even after switching off the ignition.  
B
Choose the  
D
button on the multi-function steering wheel, or the handwheel  
on the multi-function steering wheel, the activate the option for setting  
the speed limit (the value flashes).  
WARNING  
A
D
Use the  
button on the windshield wiper lever or the handwheel  
on the  
Concentrate fully at all times on your steering! As the driver you are fully re-  
sponsible for road safety.  
multi-function steering wheel to set the required speed limit., e.g. 50 km/h.  
B
D
Use the  
button on the windshield wiper lever or the handwheel  
on the  
multi-function steering wheel to confirm the required speed limit, or wait  
around 5 seconds. The setting saves automatically (the value stops flashing).  
MAXI DOT display (information display)  
This allows you to set the speed in 5 km/h intervals.  
Introduction  
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is moving  
A
With the  
button on the multi-function windshield wiper lever or the hand-  
on the multi-function steering wheel, choose the menu point Warn-  
The information display provides you with information in a convenient way con-  
cerning the current operating state of your vehicle. The information system also  
provides you with data (depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle) re-  
lating to the radio, mobile phone, multi-functional indicator, radio navigation sys-  
tem, the unit connected to the MDI input and the automatic gearbox.  
D
wheel  
ing against excessive speeds.  
You can drive at the desired speed, e.g. 50 km/h  
B
D
Use the  
button on the multi-function steering wheel, or the handwheel  
Certain functions and operating conditions are always being checked on the vehi-  
cle when the ignition is switched on and also while driving.  
on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the current speed as the speed  
limit (the value flashes).  
Functional faults, if required repair work and other information are indicated by  
red symbols ⇒ꢀpage 19 and yellow symbols ⇒ꢀpage 19.  
Lighting up of certain symbols is combined with an acoustic warning signal.  
If you wish to change the speed limit that was set, it is changed in 5 km/h inter-  
vals (e.g. the accepted speed of 47 km/h increases to 50 km/h or decreases to 45  
km/h).  
B
Press the  
button on the windshield wiper lever a second time or the hand-  
on the multi-function steering wheel to confirm the required speed  
Information and texts giving warnings are also shown in the display ⇒ꢀpage 22.  
The following information can be shown in the display (depending on the equip-  
ment installed on the vehicle):  
D
wheel  
limit, or wait around 5 seconds. The setting saves automatically (the value  
stops flashing).  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
18 Instruments and warning lights  
You can select the following information (depending on the equipment installed  
on the vehicle):  
Main menu  
⇒ꢀpage 18  
⇒ꢀpage 18  
Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar  
warning  
MFD ⇒ꢀpage 14  
Service Interval Display  
⇒ꢀpage 12  
⇒ꢀpage 126  
Audio  
Selector lever position for an automatic gearbox  
Navigation  
CAUTION  
Phone ⇒ꢀpage 141  
Aux. Heating ⇒ꢀpage 106  
Pull out the ignition key while having contact with the display (for example when  
cleaning) in order to prevent any damage.  
Vehicle status ⇒ꢀpage 19  
Settings ⇒ꢀpage 19  
Main menu  
The menu point Audio is only then displayed when the factory-fitted car radio is  
switched on.  
The menu point Navigation is only then displayed when the factory-fitted radio  
navigation system is switched on.  
The menu point Aux. heating is only then displayed, if the vehicle is factory-fitted  
with auxiliary heating.  
Note  
If warning messages are shown in the information display, these messages  
B
can be confirmed with the button  
on the windshield wiper lever or with the  
D
button  
If you do not activate the information display at that moment, the menu shifts  
to one level higher every 10 seconds.  
The operation of the factory-fitted car stereo or radio navigation system is de-  
on the multifunction steering wheel in order to call up the main menu.  
Fig. 7 Information display: Controls on the windshield wiper lever/controls on the multifunc-  
tion steering wheel  
Operating with the buttons on the windshield wiper lever  
A
You can activate the Main Menu by pressing the rocker switch  
more than 1 second.  
⇒ꢀfig. 7 for  
scribed in separate operating instructions to be found in the on-board literature.  
A
You can select individual menu points by means of the rocker switch . When  
Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warning  
B
the pushbutton  
played.  
is briefly pressed, the information you have selected is dis-  
The door, luggage compartment and bonnet ajar warning lights up if at least one  
door, the luggage compartment or bonnet are not closed. The symbol indicates  
which door is still open or whether the luggage compartment door or bonnet is  
not closed.  
Operating with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel  
C
You can activate the Main menu by pressing the rocker switch  
⇒ꢀfig. 7 for  
more than 1 second.  
The symbol goes out as soon as the doors, luggage compartment door and bonnet  
are completely closed.  
C
By briefly pressing the  
button you will reach one level higher.  
D
You can select the individual menus by pressing the handwheel . After brief-  
ly pressing the handwheel , the desired menu is indicated.  
A warning signal sounds if the car is driven at a speed of more than 6km/hour and  
if the engine or the luggage compartment door is open.  
D
Instruments and warning lights 19  
Auto Check Control  
Engine oil pressure too low  
⇒ꢀpage 26  
⇒ꢀpage 31  
Overheated clutches of the automatic  
gearbox DSG  
Car state  
The Auto Check Control carries out a check of certain functions and vehicle com-  
ponents. The check is performed constantly when the ignition is switched on,  
both when the vehicle is stationary, as well as when driving.  
Three successive warning signals will sound if a red symbol appears.  
Yellow symbols  
Some operational faults, urgent repairs, service work or other information appear  
in the display of the instrument cluster. The displays are shown with a red or yel-  
low light symbol depending on the priority of the message.  
A yellow symbol signals a warning.  
Check the relevant function as soon as possible.  
The meaning of the yellow symbols:  
The red symbols indicate danger (priority 1) while the yellow symbols indicate a  
warning (priortity 2). Information for the driver may also appear in addition to the  
symbols ⇒ꢀpage 22.  
There is at least one error message when the term Vehicle status is displayed in  
the menu. After selecting this menu the first of the error messages is displayed.  
Several error messages are shown on the display under the message e.g. 1/3. This  
indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is displayed. Investigate  
the displayed faults as soon as possible.  
Check engine oil level,  
engine oil sensor faulty  
⇒ꢀpage 26  
⇒ꢀpage 29  
Brake pad worn  
It is also important to have the vehicle inspected  
without delay by a specialist garage. The informa-  
tion about the maximum permissible engine speed  
is displayed together with this symbol.  
Problem with en-  
gine oil pressure  
As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the symbols are always indica-  
ted again. After the first display, the symbols are indicated without information for  
the driver.  
In certain countries, if a yellow symbol appears one warning signal will sound as  
well.  
If a fault occurs, a warning signal will also sound in addition to the symbol and  
text in the display:  
If several operational faults of priority 2 exist, the symbols appear one after the  
other and are each illuminated for about 5 seconds.  
Priority 1 - three warning signals  
Priority 2 - one warning signal  
Set-up  
Red symbols  
You can change certain settings by means of the information display. The current  
setting is shown on the information display in the respective menu at the top be-  
low the line.  
A red symbol signals danger.  
Stop the vehicle.  
You can select the following information (depending on the equipment installed  
on the vehicle):  
Switch the engine off.  
Investigate the function indicated.  
Obtain professional assistance.  
Language  
Autom. blind  
MFD Data  
Convenience  
Meaning of the red symbols:  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
20 Instruments and warning lights  
Lights & Vision  
Time  
Mirror adjust.  
Switch on/off the function for left and right exterior  
mirror setting simultaneously.  
Winter tyres  
Units  
Factory setting  
Restore the Convenience factory setting.  
Assistants  
a)  
b)  
This function is only available on vehicles with a rain sensor.  
Alternative speed displayed (Second speed)  
This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable driver seat.  
Service Interval (Service)  
Lights and Visibility  
Factory setting  
Here you can activate, deactivate or adjust the following functions:  
Back  
Coming Home  
Leaving Home  
Footwell light  
Dayl. dri. light  
Rear wiper  
Switch on/off and adjust the light duration of the Com-  
ing Home function.  
After selecting the menu point Back you will reach one level higher in the menu.  
Language  
Switch on/off and adjust the light duration of the Com-  
ing Home function.  
Here you can set in which language the warning and information texts should be  
displayed.  
Switch on/off and adjust the footwell light intensity.  
Switch on/off the “DAY LIGHT” function.  
Automatic blind (Combi)  
Here you can deactivate/activate the automatic roll-up function of the luggage  
compartment roll cover when opening the boot lid.  
Switch on/off the function for automatic rear window  
wiping.  
Displays of the MFA  
Here you can switch off or on certain displays of the multi-functional indicator.  
Lane ch. flash  
(convenience flashing)  
Switch on/off the convenience flashing function.  
Switch on/off the travel model function.  
Restore the factory setting for the lighting.  
Comfort  
Travel mode  
Here you can activate, deactivate or adjust the following functions:  
Factory setting  
Switch on/off the function for automatically closing the  
window and panoramic tilt/slide sunroof in a locked rain  
when it starts raining . If the function is set and it is not  
Rain closing  
a)  
Time  
raining, the windows including the panoramic tilt/slide  
sunroof will close automatically after approx. 12 hours.  
Here you can set the time, the time format (12 or 24 hour indicator) and the time  
change summer/winter time.  
ATA confirm  
Central locking  
Window op.  
Switch on/off the acoustic signal indicating activation of  
the anti-theft alarm system.  
Winter tyres  
Switch on/off the central locking and automatic locking  
function also applies for the KESSY system.  
Here you can set at which speed a warning signal should sound. This function is  
used for e.g winter tyres with the permissible maximum speed less than the maxi-  
mum speed of the vehicle.  
Here you can set the convenience mode only for the  
driver window or for all the windows.  
When exceeding the speed, an indication is displayed on the information display:  
Mirror down  
Switch on/off the function for mirror lowering on the  
b)  
£
Winter tyres max. speed ... km/h  
front passenger side when engaging the reverse gear  
.
Instruments and warning lights 21  
Measures  
Display in rear centre console  
Here you can set the units for temperature, consumption and distance driven.  
Assistants  
Here you can adjust the tones of the acoustic signals of the parking aid.  
Second speed  
1)  
Here you can switch on the display of the second speed in mph or in km/h .  
Service  
Here you can have the kilometers still to be driven and the days until the follow-  
ing service interval shown and the Service Interval Display reset.  
Fig. 8 Centre console at rear: Display  
Factory Setting  
The time and the outside temperature is displayed on the display in the rear cen-  
tre console when the ignition is switched on ⇒ꢀfig. 8.  
The values are taken over by the instrument cluster.  
After selecting the menu Factory Setting the factory setting of the information  
display is established again.  
1)  
Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
22 Instruments and warning lights  
Warning lights  
Overview  
The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults.  
Fig. 9 Instrument cluster with warning lights  
Turn signal lights (to the left)  
Turn signal lights (to the right)  
Fog lights  
⇒ꢀpage 23  
Failure of the light bulbs  
⇒ꢀpage 24  
⇒ꢀpage 24  
⇒ꢀpage 24  
⇒ꢀpage 25  
⇒ꢀpage 25  
⇒ꢀpage 25  
⇒ꢀpage 26  
⇒ꢀpage 23  
⇒ꢀpage 23  
⇒ꢀpage 24  
⇒ꢀpage 24  
⇒ꢀpage 24  
⇒ꢀpage 24  
Adaptive headlights  
Diesel particle filter (diesel engine)  
Airbag system  
Main beam  
Low beam  
Control system for exhaust  
Electromechanical power steering  
Steering lock (KESSY system)  
Rear fog light  
  
Speed regulating system  
£
Engine oil pressure  
Instruments and warning lights 23  
EPC fault light (petrol engine)  
⇒ꢀpage 26  
⇒ꢀpage 27  
⇒ꢀpage 27  
⇒ꢀpage 27  
⇒ꢀpage 28  
⇒ꢀpage 28  
⇒ꢀpage 28  
⇒ꢀpage 28  
⇒ꢀpage 28  
⇒ꢀpage 29  
⇒ꢀpage 29  
⇒ꢀpage 29  
⇒ꢀpage 29  
⇒ꢀpage 30  
⇒ꢀpage 30  
⇒ꢀpage 30  
Engine oil level  
Fuel reserve  
⇒ꢀpage 26  
⇒ꢀpage 30  
  
Glow plug system (diesel engine)  
Coolant temperature/coolant level  
Traction control system (TCS)  
WARNING  
If you do not pay attention to the warning lights coming on and the corre-  
sponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result in severe body inju-  
ries or major vehicle damage.  
Electronic stability programme (ESP)  
Switch off traction control system (TCS)  
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. There is a risk of  
injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the engine compart-  
ment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. It is also essential  
to observe all warnings ⇒ꢀpage 198, Working in the engine compartment.  
Selector lever lock  
Starting (KESSY system)  
Note  
Tyre pressure  
The arrangement of the indicator lights depends on the model version. The  
symbols shown in the following functional description are to be found as indicator  
lights in the instrument cluster.  
Antilock brake system (ABS)  
Bonnet  
Operational faults are shown in the instrument cluster as red symbols (priority  
1 - danger) or yellow symbols (priority 2 - warning).  
Turn signal system    
Seat belt warning light  
Brake pad wear  
Boot lid  
Either the left or right indicator light flashes depending on the position of the  
turn signal lever.  
The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a turn signal light fails. This  
does not apply when towing a trailer.  
Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the  
turn signal lights as well as both indicator lights to flash.  
Open door  
Fluid level in windshield washer system  
Brake system  
Further information about the turn signal system ⇒ꢀpage 60.  
Fog lights   
Handbrake  
The warning light comes on when the fog lights are operating ⇒ꢀpage 58.  
Generator  
⇒ꢀpage 30  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
24 Instruments and warning lights  
Main beam   
Diesel particle filter (diesel engine)  
The indicator light comes on when the main beam is selected or also when the  
If the warning light comes on, this means that soot has accumulated in the  
headlight flasher is operated.  
diesel particle filter because of the frequent short distances.  
Further information about the main beam ⇒ꢀpage 60.  
In order to clean the diesel particlulate filter, the vehicle should be driven at an  
even speed of at least 60 km/h at engine speeds of 1 800 - 2 500 rpm for at least  
15 minutes or until the warning light goes out with the 4th or 5th gear engaged  
(automatic gearbox: position S) when the traffic situation permits it. This increa-  
ses the exhaust temperature and the soot deposited in the diesel particle filter is  
burnt.  
Low beam   
The indicator light comes on when low beam is selected ⇒ꢀpage 54.  
Always pay attention to the valid speed limits ⇒ꢀ  
.
Rear fog light   
The warning light goes out after the successful cleaning of the diesel particle  
filter.  
The warning light comes on when the rear fog lights are operating ⇒ꢀpage 58.  
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light does not go out and the  
warning light begins to flash. The following is displayed in the information dis-  
play: Diesel-particle filter: Owner's manual appears. Afterwards the engine con-  
trol unit shifts the engine into the emergency mode, which only has a reduced  
power output. After switching the ignition off and on again the warning light   
comes on.  
Cruise control  
The warning light lights up, when operating the speed regulating system.  
Bulb failure   
Have the vehicle inspected without delay by your specialist garage.  
WARNING  
The warning light comes on if a bulb is faulty:  
up to 2 seconds after the ignition is switched on,  
when switching on the defective light bulb.  
If you do not pay attention to the warning light coming on and the corre-  
sponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result in injuries or major  
vehicle damage.  
The following text e.g will be displayed in the information display:  
Always adjust your speed to suit weather, road, region and traffic condi-  
Check front right dipped beam! (Check front right dipped beam!)  
tions. The route indicated by the warning light must not tempt you to disre-  
gard the national regulations for road traffic.  
Adaptive headlights   
CAUTION  
As long as the warning light lights up, one must take into account an increased  
fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine.  
If the warning light flashes for 1 minute while driving or after switching on the  
ignition and a warning signal sounds, a fault of the adaptive headlights is con-  
firmed.  
Note  
Further information ⇒ꢀpage 57.  
Further information about diesel particle filter ⇒ꢀpage 179.  
Instruments and warning lights 25  
If the warning light does not go out after starting the engine or it lights up when  
driving, a fault exists in an exhaust relevant component. The engine management  
system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the near-  
Airbag system   
Monitoring the airbag system  
est specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.  
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.  
There is a fault in the system if the warning light does not go out or flashes while  
driving ⇒ꢀ . This also applies if the warning light does not come on when the ig-  
nition is switched on.  
Electromechanical power steering/Steering lock (KESSY system)  
  
The following text will be displayed in the information display:  
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.  
Error: Airbag (Error: Airbag)  
If the warning light after switching on the ignition or when driving lights up con-  
tinuously, a fault exists in the electromechanical power steering.  
The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically when one  
airbag has been switched off.  
If the warning light lights up, this indicates a partial failure of the power  
steering and the steering assist can be less.  
If the warning light lights up, this indicates a complete failure of the power  
steering and thus the steering assist.  
Further information ⇒ꢀpage 178.  
The following situation applies if the front, side and head airbags or belt ten-  
sioner have been switched off using the vehicle system tester:  
The warning light lights up for 4 seconds after switching on the ignition and  
then flashes again for 12 seconds afterwards in 2 second intervals.  
The following text will be displayed in the information display:  
Airbag/belt tensioner deactivated  
Steering lock (KESSY system)  
While the warning light or is flashing, the steering lock cannot be re-  
leased. Further information ⇒ꢀpage 114, KESSY system.  
If the warning light flashes, a signal tone sonds, and the following message  
The following situation applies if the airbag has been switched off using the  
switch for the airbag in the storage compartment:  
appears in the information display Steering column lock: Workshop! (Steering  
lock: the electrical steering lock is faulty. Drive to the nearest workshop using ex-  
treme caution.  
the warning light comes on for 4 seconds after the ignition has been  
switched on,  
The switched off airbags are indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the  
If the warning light flashes, a signal tone sonds, and the following message  
lighting up of the warning light     (airbag switched off)  
⇒ꢀpage 165.  
appears in the information display Steering column lock faulty. the electrical  
steering lock is faulty. Turn the vehicle ignition off and do not continue your jour-  
ney, contact a specialist garage for approval. After switching off the ignition, it is  
then no longer possible to lock the steering, to activate the electrical components  
(e.g. car stereo, radio navigation system), to switch on the ignition again and to  
start the engine.  
WARNING  
Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a fault  
exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event  
of an accident.  
WARNING  
£
Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective.  
Control system for exhaust   
The warning light comes on after the ignition has been switched on.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
26 Instruments and warning lights  
Note  
Engine oil level  
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the yellow warning light   
comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driv-  
ing a short distance. If the yellow warning light goes out after starting the en-  
gine again and a short drive, it is necessary to visit a specialist garage.  
Warning light lights up  
If the warning light lights up, the quantity of oil in the engine is probably too  
low. Check as soon as possible the oil level or top up ⇒ꢀpage 200 with engine oil.  
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.  
The following text will be displayed in the information display:  
Check oil level! (Check oil level!)  
Engine oil pressure   
1)  
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched  
on.  
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds.  
If no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on again after  
driving about 100 km.  
Stop the vehicle and switch the engine off if the warning light does not go off  
after the engine has started or flashes while driving. Check the oil level and top up  
with oil as necessary ⇒ꢀpage 200.  
Warning light flashes  
An audible signal sounds three times as an additional warning signal.  
A fault on the engine oil level sensor is indicated additionally by an audible signal  
and the warning light coming on several times after the ignition has been switch-  
ed on.  
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the con-  
ditions prevailing to top up with oil. Keep the engine switched off and obtain pro-  
fessional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe en-  
gine damage.  
In this case have the engine inspected without delay by a specialist garage.  
The following text will be displayed in the information display:  
Oil sensor: Workshop! (Oil sensor: Workshop!)  
Do not drive any further if the warning light flashes even if the oil is at the correct  
level. Do not run the engine not at idling speed either. Contact the nearest spe-  
cialist garage to obtain professional assistance.  
EPC fault light  (petrol engine)  
The following text will be displayed in the information display:  
Oil Pressure: Engine off! Owner's manual! . Switch off the engine! Car docu-  
mentation!  
The  (Electronic Power Control) warning light comes on for a few seconds when  
the ignition is switched on.  
If the warning light  does not go out or lights up after starting the engine, a  
fault exists in the engine control. The engine management system selects an  
emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist ga-  
rage by adopting a gentle style of driving.  
WARNING  
If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe dis-  
tance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard  
warning light system.  
The red oil pressure light is not an oil level indicator! One should there-  
fore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably after every refueling  
stop.  
1)  
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after switching  
the ignition on, but only if a fault exists or the engine oil level is too low.  
Instruments and warning lights 27  
Do not continue driving if the warning light does not go off although the fluid is  
at the correct level and also the fuse of the fan is in proper order. Contact a spe-  
cialist garage to obtain assistance.  
Glow plug system (diesel engine)  
The indicator light lights up for a cold engine when switching on the ignition  
(pre-heat position) 2 ⇒ꢀpage 110. Start the engine after the indicator light goes  
Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ꢀpage 201, Cooling system.  
The following text will be displayed in the information display:  
Check coolant! Owner's manual! Check coolant! Car documentation!  
out.  
The glow plug indicator light will come on for about 1 second if the engine is at a  
normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5°C. This  
means that you can start the engine right away.  
WARNING  
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light does not come on  
or lights up continuously; contact a specialist garage as soon as possible to ob-  
tain assistance.  
If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe dis-  
tance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard  
warning light system ⇒ꢀpage 60.  
If the warning light begins to flash while driving, a fault exists in the engine  
control. The engine management system selects an emergency programme which  
enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of  
driving.  
Take care when opening the coolant expansion bottle. If the engine is hot,  
the cooling system is pressurized - risk of scalding! It is best to allow the en-  
gine to cool down before removing the cap.  
Do not touch the coolant fan The coolant fan may switch on automatically  
even if the ignition is off.  
Coolant temperature/ Coolant quantity   
1)  
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched  
on.  
Traction control system (TCS)   
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.  
The warning light comes on when driving when a control cycle is activated.  
The warning light lights up permanently if there is a fault in the system.  
The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level too low if the warning  
light does not go out or flashes while driving.  
3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.  
In this case stop and switch the engine off and check the coolant level; top up  
the coolant as necessary.  
The fact that the TCS system operates together with the ABS means that the TCS  
warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.  
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the con-  
ditions prevailing to top up with coolant. Keep the engine switched off and obtain  
professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe  
engine damage.  
If the warning light comes on immediately after starting the engine, the TCS  
system can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the TCS system can  
be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the warning light  
goes out, the TCS system is fully functional again.  
If the coolant is within the specified range, the increased temperature may be  
caused by an operating problem at the coolant fan. Check the fuse for the coolant  
fan, replace it if necessary ⇒ꢀpage 230, Fuse assignment in engine compartment -  
version 1 or ⇒ꢀpage 231, Fuse assignment in engine compartment - version 2.  
£
Further information about the TCS ⇒ꢀpage 174, Traction control system (TCS).  
1)  
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after switching the  
ignition on, but only if the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
28 Instruments and warning lights  
Note  
Selector lever lock/Starting (KESSY system)   
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light comes  
on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a  
short distance.  
If the green warning light lights up, operate the brake pedal. This is necessary,  
in order to be able to move the selector lever out of the position P or N.  
Further information about the selector lever lock ⇒ꢀpage 128.  
On vehicles with the KESSY system, the warning light lights up if you do not  
Anti-spin regulation (ASR)  
depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.  
The TCS system is switched off by pressing the button ⇒ꢀfig. 162 and the warning  
light lights up.  
Further information ⇒ꢀpage 115.  
Tyre inflation pressure  
Electronic stability programme (ESP)  
The warning light lights up, if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in  
one of the tyres. Reduce the speed and check or correct as soon as possible the  
inflation pressure in the tyres ⇒ꢀpage 210.  
If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Visit the nearest specialist ga-  
rage and have the fault rectified.  
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.  
When the ESP helps to stabilise the vehicle, the warning light flashes in the in-  
strument cluster.  
The ESP system cannot be switched off, only the TCS system can be switched off  
by pressing the button ⇒ꢀfig. 161, the warning light lights up.  
The warning light lights up permanently if there is a fault in the ESP system.  
Further information about the tyre pressure monitoring system ⇒ꢀpage 183.  
The fact that the ESP system operates together with the ABS means that the ESP  
warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.  
WARNING  
When the warning light lights up, immediately reduce the speed and  
avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Please stop the vehicle without  
delay at the nearest possible stop and inspect the tyres and their inflation  
pressures.  
If the warning light comes on immediately after starting the engine, the ESP  
system can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the ESP system can  
be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the warning light  
goes out, the ESP system is fully functional again.  
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved  
roads) the warning light can be delayed or does not light up at all.  
Further information on the ESP ⇒ꢀpage 173, Electronic stability programme (ESP).  
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)  
Note  
The EDL is a part of the ESP. A fault in the EDL is indicated by the lighting up of  
the ESP warning light in the instrument cluster. Have the vehicle inspected with-  
out delay by an authorised Service Partner. Further information on the EDL  
⇒ꢀpage 174, Electronic Differential Lock (EDL).  
If the battery has been disconnected, the warning light comes on after switch-  
ing on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance.  
Antilock brake system (ABS)   
Note  
The warning light shows the functionality of the ABS.  
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light comes  
on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a  
short distance.  
The warning light comes on for a few seconds after the ignition has been switch-  
ed on or when starting the engine. The warning light goes out after an automatic  
check sequence has been completed.  
£
Instruments and warning lights 29  
A fault in the ABS  
On vehicles with an Information display this warning light is replaced by a vehicle  
symbol.  
The system is not functioning properly if the ABS warning light does not go out  
within a few seconds after switching on the ignition, does not light up at all or  
lights up while driving. The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake sys-  
tem. Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropri-  
ately as you will not know how great the damage is.  
Seat belt warning light   
The warning light comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for  
the driver and front passenger to fasten the seat belt. The warning light only goes  
out if the driver or front passenger has fastened his seat belt.  
Further information about ABS ⇒ꢀpage 177, Antilock brake system (ABS).  
A fault in the entire brake system  
If the seat belt has not been fastened by the driver or front passenger, a perma-  
nent warning signal sounds at vehicle speeds greater than 20 km/h and simulta-  
neously the warning light flashes.  
If the ABS warning light comes on together with the brake system warning  
light (handbrake must be released), there is a fault not only in the ABS but also  
in another part of the brake system ⇒ꢀ  
.
If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next 90  
seconds, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light lights up per-  
manently.  
WARNING  
If the brake system warning light comes on together with the ABS  
For further information on the seat belts ⇒ꢀpage 153, Seat belts.  
warning light stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level  
in the reservoir ⇒ꢀpage 204, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has dropped below  
the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Contact a Škoda  
dealer to obtain professional assistance.  
Thickness of the brake pads   
1)  
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched  
on.  
Pay attention to the following instructions ⇒ꢀpage 198, Working in the en-  
gine compartment before checking the brake fluid level and opening the bon-  
net.  
If the warning light comes on, contact a specialist garage immediately and have  
the brake pads on all of the wheels inspected.  
If the brake fluid is at the correct level, the ABS control function has failed.  
The rear wheels may then block very rapidly when braking. In certain circum-  
stances, this can result in the rear end of the car breaking away - risk of skid-  
ding! Drive carefully to the nearest specialist garage and have the fault recti-  
fied.  
The following text will be displayed in the information display:  
Check brake pads! (Check brake pads!)  
Boot lid   
Bonnet   
The warning light comes on when the ignition is switched on if the luggage  
compartment door is open. If the boot lid opens while driving , the warning light  
lights up and an audible signal sounds.  
The warning light comes on if the bonnet is unlocked. If the engine bonnet un-  
locks while driving , the warning light lights up and an audible signal sounds.  
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning  
light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.  
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning  
light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.  
£
1)  
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after switching the  
ignition on, but only if a fault exists.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
30 Instruments and warning lights  
In vehicles with an information display, this warning light is replaced by a vehicle  
symbol⇒ꢀpage 18  
For further information on the brake system ⇒ꢀpage 175, Brakes.  
WARNING  
Open door  
Pay attention to the following instructions ⇒ꢀpage 198, Working in the en-  
gine compartment before checking the brake fluid level and opening the bon-  
net.  
The warning light comes on, if one or several doors are opened. If one of the  
doors opens while driving, the warning light lights up and an audible signal  
sounds.  
If the brake system warning light does not go out a few seconds after  
switching on the ignition or comes on when driving, stop immediately and  
check the brake fluid in the reservoir ⇒ꢀpage 204, Brake fluid. If the fluid level  
has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of acci-  
dent! Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.  
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning  
light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.  
In vehicles with an information display, this warning light is replaced by a vehicle  
symbol⇒ꢀpage 18  
Handbrake   
Windshield washer fluid level  
The warning light comes on if the handbrake is applied. An audible warning is  
also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6  
km/h.  
The warning light comes on when the ignition is switched on if there is insuffi-  
cient fluid in the windshield washer system. Top up with liquid ⇒ꢀpage 208.  
The following text will be displayed in the information display:  
The following text will be displayed in the information display:  
Release parking brake! (Release parking brake!)  
Top up wash fluid! (Top up washer fluid)  
Alternator   
Brake system   
The warning light comes on after the ignition has been switched on. It should  
go out after the engine has started.  
The warning light lights up when the brake fluid level is too low or there is a  
fault in the ABS.  
If the warning light does not go out after the engine has started, or comes on  
when driving, drive to the nearest specialist garage. The vehicle battery will be  
discharged in this case so switch off all non-essential electrical components.  
if the warning light flashes and an audible signal sounds three times, stop and  
check the brake fluid level ⇒ꢀ  
.
The following text will be displayed in the information display:  
CAUTION  
Brake fluid: Owner's manual Car documentation!  
If the warning light comes on when driving and in addition the warning light   
(cooling system fault) also comes on in display, you must then stop the car imme-  
diately and switch the engine off - risk of engine damage!  
If there is a fault in the ABS which also influences the function of the brake sys-  
tem (e.g. distribution of brake pressure), the ABS warning light comes on and at  
the same time the brake system warning light starts flashing . Be aware that  
not only the ABS but also another part of th brake system is defective ⇒ꢀ  
An audible signal sounds three times as an additional warning signal.  
.
Fuel reserve   
One should get used to high pedal forces, long braking distances and long free  
play of the brake pedal when driving to the next specialist garage.  
The warning light comes on, if the fuel level is still below 9 litres.  
£
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.  
Instruments and warning lights 31  
The following text will be displayed in the information display:  
Please refuel! Range...km (Please refuel! (Range...km)  
Note  
The Text in the information display goes out only after refuelling and driving a  
short distance.  
Temperature of the clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG   
In the event that the temperature of the clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG is  
too high, the symbol and the warning are shown in the Information display:  
Gearbox overheated. Stop! Owner's man.! (Transmission overheated. Stop!  
Car documentation!  
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.  
WARNING  
If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance  
from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning  
light system.  
CAUTION  
In the event that the clutches of the automatic gearbox have overheated, bring  
the vehicle to a stop and switch off the engine. You must wait until the symbol   
and the warning go out - risk of gearbox damage! You can continue the trip as  
soon as the symbol and the warning go out.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
32 Unlocking and locking  
Unlocking and locking  
Changing the battery in the remote control key  
Vehicle key  
Description  
Fig. 11 Remote control key - remove cover/remove battery  
Fig. 10 Remote control key  
B
Each remote control key contains a battery which is housed under the cover  
A
⇒ꢀfig. 11. If the battery is discharged, the red warning light  
does not flash after  
Two remote control keys are provided with the vehicle ⇒ꢀfig. 10.  
you press a button on the remote control key ⇒ꢀfig. 10. We recommend that you  
have the batteries of the key replaced by an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner.  
You should, however, proceed as follows if you wish to replace the discharged  
battery yourself:  
WARNING  
Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle - even if it is only  
for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle.  
The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical equipment  
(e.g. power windows) - risk of injury!  
Fold open the key.  
Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver at the  
1
points of the arrows  
from ⇒ꢀfig. 11.  
Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle  
Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down-  
2
has come to a stop. The steering lock might otherwise engage unintentionally  
- risk of accident!  
wards at the point of the arrow  
⇒ꢀfig. 11.  
Insert the new battery. Ensure that the “+” symbol on the battery is facing up-  
wards. The correct polarity is shown on the battery cover.  
CAUTION  
Each key contains electronic components; therefore protect them against  
Position the battery cover on the key and press on it until it is heard to lock in  
place.  
moisture and severe shocks.  
Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean as impurities (textile fibres, dust  
etc.) have a negative effect on the proper operation of the locking cylinder and the  
ignition lock.  
For the sake of the environment  
Dispose of a used battery in accordance with environmental regulations.  
£
Note  
Please approach an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner if you lose a key since he  
can obtain a new one for you.  
Unlocking and locking 33  
The rear doors are equipped with a child safety lock. You can switch the child  
safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.  
Note  
tery.  
Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.  
The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original bat-  
Switching child safety lock on  
Use the vehicle key to turn the slit in the rear door to the left in the direction  
If it is still not be possible to unlock or lock the vehicle with the remote control  
of the arrow ⇒ꢀfig. 12.  
key even after replacing the battery, this means that the system has to be  
synchronised ⇒ꢀpage 45.  
Switching child safety lock off  
Use the vehicle key to turn the slit to the right against the direction of the ar-  
row.  
Electronic immobiliser  
So long as the child safety lock is switched on it is not possible to open the door  
from the inside with the door opening lever. In this case the door can be opened  
only from the outside.  
The electronic immobiliser prevents the vehicle being operated by  
an unauthorised person.  
An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deactiva-  
ted with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock. The elec-  
tronic immobiliser is automatically activated when you withdraw the ignition key  
from the lock.  
Central locking system  
Description  
Note  
It is only possible to start the engine of your car with a Genuine ŠKODA key with  
the matching code.  
When using the central locking and unlocking system, all the doors and the fuel  
filler flap are locked or unlocked at the same time (if it was not set differently in  
the menu point Settings - Convenience of the information display). The boot lid is  
unlocked when opening. Afterwards you can open the boot lid by pressing the  
handle on the lower edge of the boot lid ⇒ꢀpage 38.  
Child safety lock  
Operation of the central locking system is possible:  
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened  
from the inside.  
with a remote control key ⇒ꢀpage 44,  
using the buttons for the central locking system ⇒ꢀpage 35,  
from the outside using the vehicle key ⇒ꢀpage 38, Emergency unlocking and  
locking of the driver's door.  
Indicator light in the driver's door  
After locking the vehicle, the warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick  
succession, afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals.  
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system ⇒ꢀpage 34 is not operating,  
the indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out and  
starts to flash evenly at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.  
Fig. 12 Child safety locks on the rear  
doors  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
34 Unlocking and locking  
If the indicator light first of all flashes fast for about 2 seconds, afterwards lights  
up for about 30 seconds without interruption and then flashes slowly, there is a  
fault in the system of the central locking or in the interior monitor and in the tow-  
ing protection monitoring ⇒ꢀpage 46. Visit a specialist garage to obtain assis-  
tance.  
If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked again. In  
addition, it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the vehicle by  
pressing the central locking button ⇒ꢀpage 35 or by pulling the door opening  
lever on one of the front doors.  
You can have the function of the automatic locking activated by a specialist ga-  
rage on request or you can also activate it yourself with the aid of the Information  
display ⇒ꢀpage 19.  
Convenience operation of windows  
One can open and close the windows when opening and closing the vehicle  
⇒ꢀpage 48.  
WARNING  
Opening a single door  
Locking the doors prevents involuntary opening in an exceptional situation  
(an accident). Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from out-  
side, for example at road crossings. Locked doors do, however, make it more  
difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - danger to life!  
This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver's door. The other doors  
and the fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked after repetitive unlock-  
ing.  
You can have the function of the automatic locking activated by a specialist ga-  
rage on request or you can also activate it yourself with the aid of the Information  
display ⇒ꢀpage 19.  
Note  
In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors  
are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehi-  
cle.  
Unlocking a vehicle side door  
This selection function enables to unlock both doors on the driver's side. The oth-  
er doors and the fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked after repeti-  
tive unlocking.  
Only the driver's door can be unlocked or locked using the key if the central  
locking system fails ⇒ꢀpage 38, Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's  
door. You can lock or unlock manually the other doors and the boot lid.  
Emergency locking of the door ⇒ꢀpage 38.  
Emergency unlocking of the boot lid ⇒ꢀpage 43.  
You can have the function of the automatic locking activated by a specialist ga-  
rage on request or you can also activate it yourself with the aid of the Information  
display ⇒ꢀpage 19.  
Safe securing  
Unlocking the vehicle with the KESSY system  
This selection function enables to unlock all the doors, individual doors, both  
doors on the left and right vehicle side or to unlock the driver and front passenger  
door at the same time. The other doors and the fuel filler flap remain locked and  
are only unlocked after repetitive unlocking using the unlock button on the re-  
mote control key ⇒ꢀfig. 10 or the button for the central locking system ⇒ꢀfig. 13.  
You can have the function opening a single door activated by an authorised  
ŠKODA Service Partner on request or you can activate it yourself with the aid of  
the Information display ⇒ꢀpage 19.  
The central locking system is equipped with a safe securing system. Locking the  
vehicle from the outside causes the door locks to be automatically blocked. The  
warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession, afterwards it be-  
gins to flash evenly at longer intervals. It is not possible to open the doors with  
the door handle either from the inside or from the outside. This acts as an effec-  
tive deterrent for attempts to break into your vehicle.  
You can deactivate the safe securing system by locking twice within 2 seconds.  
If the safe securing system is not operating:  
Automatic locking and unlocking  
the indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out  
and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds,  
is the filler flap locked.  
All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car reaches a  
speed of about 15 km/h.  
£
Unlocking and locking 35  
The safe securing system is again activated the next time the vehicle is unlocked  
and locked again.  
Locking all doors and the boot lid  
Press on the bottom part of the button ⇒ꢀfig. 13. The symbol in the button  
comes on.  
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is deactivated, you can open  
the vehicle from the inside by pulling on the door opening lever.  
Unlocking all doors and the boot lid  
Press on the top part of the button ⇒ꢀfig. 13. The symbol goes out in the but-  
WARNING  
ton.  
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti-  
vated, there must not be any person and animals in the vehicle as it is then  
not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked  
doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergen-  
cy - hazard!  
The following applies if you have locked your vehicle using the central locking sys-  
tem:  
It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside (safety fea-  
ture, e.g. when stopping at traffic lights etc.).  
You can unlock the doors individually from the inside and open them by pulling  
the door opening lever.  
Note  
The anti-theft alarm system is also activated with the deactivated safe secur-  
If at least one door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.  
ing system when locking the vehicle. The interior monitor is however not activa-  
ted.  
In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors  
are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain ac-  
cess to the vehicle.  
When activating the Safelock function after you lock the vehicle, the message  
CHECK DEADLOCK will appear to inform you about this. In vehicles equipped with  
an information display, the message Check deadlock! appears Owner's manual!  
(CHECK DEADLOCK appears.  
By pressing and holding down the top and bottom part of the rocker switch in the  
driver's door, you can conveniently close or open the windows.  
WARNING  
Button for the central locking system  
The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off. All the  
doors and the boot lid are locked. Children should never be left unattended in  
the vehicle since it is difficult to provide assistance from the outside when the  
doors are locked. Locked doors make it difficult for rescuers to get into the ve-  
hicle in an emergency - hazard!  
Note  
The door opening lever and the buttons for the central locking system do not op-  
erate if the safe securing system is activated ⇒ꢀpage 34.  
Fig. 13 Button for the central locking  
system  
If the vehicle was not locked from the outside, you can also unlock and lock it with  
the rocker switch on the door opening lever of the driver or front passenger door  
even without the ignition switched on.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
36 Unlocking and locking  
A
B
If a valid remote control key is located in the area  
⇒ꢀfig. 14 or  
of the vehicle,  
KESSY system  
it is possible to unlock the vehicle via the relevant door of the area in which the  
A
key is located. This means, if the key is located in the area , you can unlock the  
Description  
vehicle from the handle on the front left door. If the valid key is located in the area  
C
, it is possible to unlock the boot lid.  
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables a comfort unlocking  
and locking of the vehicle and a start-up without actively using the remote control  
key. It is sufficient to carry the key with you, for example in your pocket, for un-  
locking and locking the vehicle or for starting the engine.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
If you hold the door handle of the front door or cover the sensor  
with the whole palm of your hand, the vehicle is then unlocked. If you cover  
2
⇒ꢀfig. 14  
2
1
the sensor  
and at the same time the sensor  
when unlocking, the vehicle  
The functions of the central locking system, the safe securing system and the an-  
ti-theft alarm system correspond to vehicles without KESSY system. Only the con-  
trol elements are different.  
is not unlocked.  
Locking the vehicle  
Close the driver or front passenger door.  
Control elements of the system:  
1
Sensor on the outside of the door handle for the front door  
serves for locking the vehicle,  
Sensor on the inside of the door handle for the front door  
⇒ꢀfig. 14 -  
1
If you touch the sensor  
with your fingers, the vehicle is now locked (while  
doing so do not hold the door handle, otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked).  
2
⇒ꢀfig. 14 - serves  
On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved  
into the position P before unlocking.  
for unlocking the vehicle.  
Deactivating safe securing system  
Unlocking and locking car  
1
Touch the sensor  
twice within 2 seconds.  
Unlocking and locking the boot lid  
If you press on the handle of the boot lid, the lid is then unlocked. If the vehi-  
cle is fitted with the electric boot lid system, the lid begins to open after press-  
ing the handle.  
If the boot lid is closed, it is locked.  
Check locking  
1
After locking the vehicle with the aid of the sensor  
⇒ꢀfig. 14, it is not possible to  
2
unlock the vehicle with the aid of the sensor  
for 2 seconds. Thus, it is possible  
Fig. 14 KESSY: Designation of the areas and unlocking/locking the vehicle  
to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling on the handle.  
To lock/unlock a vehicle fitted with the KESSY system, it is necessary that the val-  
id radio-controlled key is no more than around 1.5 metres from the front door han-  
dle or luggage compartment door.  
CAUTION  
After leaving the vehicle, it does not lock automatically, this is why you should pay  
attention to the procedure for locking the vehicle ⇒ꢀpage 36.  
£
Unlocking and locking 37  
strongly disturbed. This message is also displayed when the ignition is switched  
on or the engine is running and the system cannot detect a valid key in the vehi-  
cle.  
Note  
If the vehicle battery or the battery in the remote control key is weak or dis-  
charged, perhaps the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked via KESSY. In this case,  
use the emergency unlocking or emergency locking of the driver's door  
⇒ꢀpage 38  
The KESSY system can find the valid key, even if it was left behind in the front  
area of the car roof for example. Make sure you know where the valid remote con-  
trol key is at all times.  
Keyless faulty. or CHECK KEYLESS.  
There is a fault in the KESSY system, contact your specialist garage.  
Renew key battery! or KEY BATTERY  
Low voltage is present in the battery of the remote control key, change the bat-  
tery.  
1
2
When locking/unlocking the vehicle using the sensors ⇒ꢀfig. 14 or  
do not  
use gloves or other objects which might prevent the hand from coming into con-  
tact with the sensor directly.  
Parking the vehicle  
The vehicle will lock again automatically if you unlock the vehicle at the handle  
with the aid of the sensor but do not open a door or the boot lid within the next  
30 seconds. The safelock and/or anti-theft alarm system will reactivate. This func-  
tion is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.  
1
2
If the vehicle is not unlocked within 60 hours, the sensors  
⇒ꢀfig. 14 and  
in  
the handle of the front passenger's door are automatically deactivated. For reacti-  
vation, one of the following conditions must be met:  
2
Unlocking the driver's door with the aid of the sensor  
pressing the handle of the boot lid,  
⇒ꢀfig. 14,  
Protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle  
unlocking the vehicle using the button on the remote control key,  
If the key, which was used to lock the vehicle, remains in the vehicle in the area  
Emergency unlocking of the driver's door ⇒ꢀpage 38.  
D
⇒ꢀfig. 14 after locking and closing all of the doors including the boot lid, the pro-  
tection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle is activated and the  
vehicle unlocks itself again.  
1
2
If the vehicle is not unlocked within 90 hours, the sensors  
⇒ꢀfig. 14 and  
in  
the handle of the driver's door are also automatically deactivated. For reactivation,  
one of the following conditions must be met:  
You are informed about the activation of the protection against inadvertently  
locking the key in the vehicle by the turn signal lights flashing and the message  
Key in vehicle which appears in the information display. or KEY IN VEHICLE. Addi-  
tionally, on vehicles which are fitted with the anti-theft alarm system, an audible  
signal sounds.  
unlocking the vehicle using the button on the remote control key,  
Emergency unlocking of the driver's door ⇒ꢀpage 38.  
Convenience operation of windows  
Messages in the instrument cluster display  
1
If you hold your finger on the sensor  
⇒ꢀfig. 14 for more than 2 seconds while  
locking the vehicle, the opened windows and the panoramic sliding roof are  
closed. If you lift your finger off the sensor , the closing process is interrupted. If  
A few warning and information texts of the KESSY system in the information dis-  
play or in the display of the instrument cluster:  
1
1
you touch the sensor  
again, the closing process of the windows and the panor-  
amic sliding roof continues.  
Key not found. or No Key  
2
If you immediately touch the sensor  
during the closing process of the windows  
This message is displayed when the engine is started and the system cannot de-  
tect a valid key in the vehicle. This can occur if the key is outside the vehicle, the  
battery in the key is discharged, the key is defective or the electromagnetic field is  
1
and the panoramic sliding roof initiated by sensor , all of the windows and the  
panoramic sliding roof are opened again.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
38 Unlocking and locking  
Locking  
Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's door  
A
Remove the panel  
⇒ꢀfig. 16.  
If the remote control key or the central locking system does not op-  
erate, the driver's door can be unlocked or locked manually.  
B
Insert the key into the slot  
and turn it into the horizontal position in the  
direction of the arrow (mirror-inverted on the right doors).  
Re-insert the panel.  
After closing the door, you can no longer open it from outside. The door can be  
unlocked from the inside by pulling on the door handle again, and then opened  
from the outside.  
Twindoor - small boot lid  
Fig. 15 Handle on the driver's door: cov-  
ered locking cylinder  
Pull on the handle.  
Guide the vehicle key into the recess on the bottom side of the cover and lift it  
up to the top.  
Put the vehicle key into the locking cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle.  
Emergency locking of the doors  
Fig. 17 Handle of boot lid/opened small boot lid  
After unlocking the vehicle with the remote control key or the key ⇒ꢀpage 38 you  
can open the small boot lid ⇒ꢀfig. 17.  
Open small boot lid  
Press on the handle at the bottom side of the boot lid ⇒ꢀfig. 17 - left, the boot  
lid lifts up automatically ⇒ꢀfig. 17 - right.  
Close small boot lid  
Fig. 16 Rear door: Emergency locking of  
the door  
Pull the boot lid down and close it with a slight swing ⇒ꢀ . The bonnet locks  
automatically.  
An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors which  
have no locking cylinder, it is only visible after opening the door. Lock the doors  
using the vehicle key.  
2
You can also open the small boot lid by pressing the button  
trol key ⇒ꢀpage 44 for approx. 1 second.  
on the remote con-  
A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner paneling of the  
boot lid.  
£
Unlocking and locking 39  
Open large boot lid  
WARNING  
1
Press the handle  
⇒ꢀfig. 18 on the bottom edge of the boot lid.  
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Other-  
wise, the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock is  
closed - risk of accident!  
2
You must wait until the brake light  
in the rear window flashes twice.  
3
Press on the handle  
and at the same time raise the boot lid.  
Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise ex-  
Close large boot lid  
haust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!  
Pull the boot lid down and close it with a slight swing ⇒ꢀ . The bonnet locks  
automatically.  
Note  
After closing the boot lid, it is automatically locked within 1 second and the  
anti-theft alarm system is activated. This applies only if the vehicle was locked  
before closing the boot lid.  
A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner paneling of the  
boot lid.  
The function of the hand grip on the bottom edge of the boot lid is deactiva-  
WARNING  
ted when starting off or as of a speed of more than 5 km/hour. The function of the  
hand grip is activated again after stopping the vehicle and after opening the driver  
or front passenger door or after pressing the button  
⇒ꢀpage 44.  
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Other-  
wise, the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock is  
closed - risk of accident!  
1
on the remote control key  
Repeated opening and closing of the boot lid can lead to a temporary failure of  
Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise ex-  
the function due to the overheating protection of the motors of the Twindoor sys-  
tem.  
haust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!  
Note  
After closing the large boot lid, it is possible to open the small boot lid after  
Twindoor - large boot lid  
approx. 2 seconds.  
After closing the boot lid, it is automatically locked within 1 second and the  
anti-theft alarm system is activated. This applies only if the vehicle was locked  
before closing the boot lid.  
The function of the hand grip on the bottom edge of the boot lid is deactiva-  
ted when starting off or as of a speed of more than 5 km/hour. The function of the  
hand grip is activated again after stopping the vehicle and after opening the driver  
1
or front passenger door or after pressing the button  
on the remote control key  
⇒ꢀpage 44.  
Repeated opening and closing of the boot lid can lead to a temporary failure of  
the function due to the overheating protection of the motors of the Twindoor sys-  
tem.  
Fig. 18 Handle of boot lid/opened large boot lid  
After unlocking the vehicle with the remote control key or the key ⇒ꢀpage 38,  
Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's door you can open the large boot  
lid ⇒ꢀfig. 18.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
40 Unlocking and locking  
Note  
Boot lid (Combi)  
After closing the boot lid, it is automatically locked within 1 second and the  
anti-theft alarm system is activated. This applies only if the vehicle was locked  
before closing the boot lid.  
The function of the hand grip above the licence plate is deactivated when  
starting off or as of a speed of more than 5 km/hour for vehicles with central lock-  
ing. The function of the hand grip is activated again when the vehicle has stopped  
and a door is opened.  
Electric boot lid (Combi)  
Fig. 19 Handle of boot lid  
Open the boot lid by pressing the hand grip above the licence plate after unlock-  
ing the vehicle using the key or the radio remote control ⇒ꢀpage 38, Emergency  
unlocking and locking of the driver's door.  
Opening the boot lid  
Press on the handle ⇒ꢀfig. 19 and at the same time raise the boot lid.  
Closing the boot lid  
Pull the boot lid down and close it with a slight swing ⇒ꢀ  
.
Fig. 20 Operation of the lid  
A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner paneling of the  
boot lid.  
WARNING  
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Other-  
wise, the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock is  
closed - risk of accident!  
Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise ex-  
haust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!  
Fig. 21 Operation of the lid - button on  
the centre console  
There are several possibities for operating the electric boot lid:  
By pressing the boot lid remote release button on the remote control key for  
approx. 1 second,  
A
£
using the handle  
⇒ꢀfig. 20 above the licence plate,  
Unlocking and locking 41  
B
using the button  
the lid is opened),  
on the bottom edge of the boot lid (only accessible when  
Description of the operation  
using the button on the centre console ⇒ꢀfig. 21.  
WARNING  
Always stand clear of the closing range of the lid when closing the lid - risk of  
accident!  
CAUTION  
In a critical situation, the movement of the lid can be stopped by applying an  
abrupt and quick force against the lid.  
Before opening or closing the lid, check if there are any objects in the opening  
Fig. 22 Designation of the areas  
or closing range which could obstruct the movement (e.g. a load on the roof lug-  
gage rack or on the trailer etc.). - Risk of damaging the lid!  
When operating the lid, the system distinguishes 3 areas ⇒ꢀfig. 22 where the func-  
tion of the individual operating elements changes. The end positions of the lid -  
fully closed in the secured lock and fully opened - differ as well.  
Make sure that there is at least 10 cm of clearance above the opened boot lid  
(e.g. distance from the garage ceiling). Otherwise, it may happen that the clear-  
ance above the opened lid is no longer sufficient after relieving the vehicle of a  
load (e.g. after unloading) - risk of damaging the lid!  
Explanation of the symbol  
Feasible action  
Do not try to manually close the lid during the electric closing process. Damage  
can occur to the system of the electric boot lid.  
If you manually close the lid, make sure that you press the lock located at the  
Non-feasible action  
centre edge of the lid while pressing down the lid above the ŠKODA logo.  
Movement in the opposite direction to the previous movement  
Note  
If the electrical opening of the lid was triggered using the button on the re-  
Operation of the boot lid using the remote control key and the button on the  
centre console  
mote control key or the button on the centre console, an intermittent audible sig-  
nal sounds while the lid is moving.  
Area  
The electric boot lid is fitted with a force limiter. If the lid hits an obstacle  
Action  
Closed lid  
Opened lid  
1
2
3
when closing, it stops and an audible signal sounds. If you rapidly enter the vehi-  
cle during the opening or closing process of the boot lid, the whole vehicle may  
jerk and as a result the movement of the lid can be interrupted - the force limiter  
is activated.  
Opening  
Stop  
Manually opening and closing the boot lid is only possible in exceptional cases,  
in a slow manner and without sudden movements - if possible close to the centre  
of the lid - ; by manipulating the lid on the sides, damage to the electric lid may  
occur.  
Closing  
When the ignition is switched on, the operation of the boot lid does not function  
using the remote control key.  
In certain circumstances, if the lid is loaded (e.g by a thick layer of snow), the  
£
opening process of the lid can be interrupted. In order to ensure the electrical  
function of the lid, relieve the lid.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
42 Unlocking and locking  
If the vehicle was locked from the outside, the operation of the boot lid does not  
function using the button on the centre console ⇒ꢀfig. 21.  
If a trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the operation of the boot lid does not function  
using the remote control key or the button on the centre console.  
Signals  
Status  
Interrupted tone  
Open (using the button on the remote  
control key or the button on the centre  
console ⇒ꢀfig. 21)  
1 continuous tone  
3 rising tones  
Force limiter  
A
Operation of the boot lid using the handle  
Confirmation of the storage of the lid  
position  
Area  
2
Action  
Closed lid  
Opened lid  
1
3
3 identical tones  
fault  
Opening  
Stop  
Note  
3
The expansion of the area  
⇒ꢀfig. 22 changes proportionally, depending on the  
setting of the top position of the lid ⇒ꢀpage 42. When setting the top position of  
2
3
2
the lid in the area , the area  
is not active, the expansion of the area  
Closing  
changes proportionally to the set top position of the lid.  
A
The operation of the boot lid, using the handle  
is only possible when the vehi-  
Setting the top position of the lid  
cle is unlocked ⇒ꢀfig. 20.  
B
Operation of the boot lid using the inner button  
If the space for opening the lid is restricted (e.g. height of garage) or for more con-  
venient operation (e.g. according to a person's height), it is possible to set the  
boot lid in the top position.  
Area  
Action  
Closed lid  
Opened lid  
1
2
3
Setting the top position of the lid  
Opening  
Stop  
Stop the lid in the desired position (electrically or manually).  
B
Press the inner button  
⇒ꢀfig. 20 and hold it pressed for approx. 3 seconds.  
Storing the position in the memory of the control unit is confirmed with an au-  
dible signal.  
Closing  
Deleting the set position of the lid  
B
Operating the boot lid with the inner button  
is opened ⇒ꢀfig. 20.  
is only possible when the boot lid  
Carefully lift up the lid manually to the maximum opening position.  
B
Hold the inner button  
pressed for approx. 3 seconds. An audible signal  
Audible signals  
sounds and the height which was originally set is deleted from the memory of  
the control unit, while the basic position of the top lid position is again set.  
£
Audible signals are active during the electrical operation of the lid. They serve as a  
safety function and provide information about the success of a performed action.  
Unlocking and locking 43  
Note  
Emergency unlocking of the boot lid  
The lid always opens at the height which was last stored in the memory of the  
control unit.  
The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically, is always  
lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is  
opened manually.  
Operational problems  
If the battery is disconnected and reconnected while the boot lid is open, it is nec-  
essary to activate the system of the electric boot lid. Activating means the initiali-  
sation of the control unit by manually closing the lid. Thus, the end position of the  
lid is stored under fully closed in secured lock.  
Fig. 23 Emergency unlocking of the  
boot lid  
If there is a fault in the central locking, you can open the boot lid as follows:  
Possible malfunctions of the electric boot lid:  
Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards ⇒ꢀpage 76.  
Guide the key into the slot in the trim panel as far as the stop ⇒ꢀfig. 23.  
You can unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.  
Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.  
Examples of operational malfunctions  
Description of the malfunction  
Possible solutions  
The lid cannot be lifted out of the lock. Emergency unlocking of the lid  
⇒ꢀpage 43  
Remove the possible obstacle (e.g.  
snow), open the lid again ⇒ꢀpage 41  
Emergency unlocking of the boot lid (Estate car)  
The lid does not react to an opening  
signal  
Press the handle on the lower edge of  
the boot lid and pull the lid upwards  
Manually close the lid (slowly and with-  
The lid remains in the top position  
out sudden movements)  
Note  
Contact your specialist garage if there is a malfunction of the electric boot lid.  
Fig. 24 Emergency unlocking of the  
boot lid  
If there is a fault in the central locking, you can open the boot lid as follows:  
Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards ⇒ꢀpage 76.  
Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening in the trim in the direction  
1
£
of arrow  
⇒ꢀfig. 24 to the stop.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
44 Unlocking and locking  
2
Unlock the lid in direction of arrow  
upwards.  
Unlocking and locking car  
Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.  
Remote control  
Description  
You can use the remote control key:  
to unlock and lock the car,  
unlock or open the boot lid,  
Opening and closing window.  
Fig. 25 Remote control key  
Unlocking the vehicle   
1
Press button  
for about 1 second.  
The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control  
key. The receiver is located in the interior of the car. The operating range of the  
remote control key is approx. 30 m. But this range of the remote control can be  
reduced if the batteries are weak.  
Locking the vehicle   
3
Press button  
for about 1 second.  
Deactivating safe securing system  
The key has a fold-open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the  
car manually and also for starting the engine.  
3
Press button  
twice in 2 seconds. Further information ⇒ꢀpage 34.  
If a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or a new unit in-  
stalled, it is then necessary for an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner to initialise  
the system. Only after this is it possible to again use the remote control key.  
Small boot lid release   
2
Press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 25 for about 0.5 seconds. Further information  
⇒ꢀpage 38.  
Note  
Automatic raising of the small boot lid   
on.  
The remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched  
2
Press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 25 for about 1 seconds. Further information  
⇒ꢀpage 38.  
The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interfer-  
ence from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same frequency  
range (e.g. mobile phone, TV transmitter).  
Unlocking the Luggage compartment door without an electrical control (Combi)  
The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti-theft alarm system  
does react to the remote control at less than 3 metres away ⇒ꢀpage 32.  
If the driver door is opened, the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote  
control.  
2
Press the button  
⇒ꢀpage 40.  
⇒ꢀfig. 25 for about 1 seconds. Further information  
Automatic opening of the boot lid (Combi)  
2
Press the button  
⇒ꢀpage 41.  
⇒ꢀfig. 25 for about 1 seconds. Further information  
£
Unlocking and locking 45  
Folding out of the key  
Synchonisation of the remote control  
4
Press button  
.
If the vehicle cannot be unlocked by actuating the remote control system then it  
is possible that the code in the key and the control unit in the vehicle are no lon-  
ger synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the radio-operated key are  
actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or  
the battery on the remote control was replaced.  
Folding up of the key  
4
Press button  
and collapse the key bit in the housing.  
The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been un-  
locked. The vehicle will lock again automatically if you unlock the vehicle using  
This means it is necessary to synchronise the code as follows:  
1
button  
but do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds. The  
safelock and/or anti-theft alarm system will reactivate. This function is intended  
to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.  
press any button on the remote control;  
Pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1  
minute ⇒ꢀpage 38, Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's door.  
In addition, when the car is unlocked, the electrically adjustable seats and exterior  
mirrors move into the position assigned to this key. The stored setting of driver  
seat and exterior mirrors is retrieved.  
When the vehicle is unlocked or locked, the interior lights and the lights of the en-  
try area are automatically switched on or off via the door contact.  
Anti-theft alarm system  
Description  
Display of the locking  
The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been correctly  
locked.  
The anti-theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seek-  
ing to break into the vehicle. The system triggers audible and visual warning sig-  
nals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle.  
If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the turn  
signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.  
How is the alarm system activated?  
The anti-theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked with the key in  
the driver's door or by using the radio remote control ⇒ꢀpage 38, Emergency un-  
locking and locking of the driver's door. The door contact monitoring is activated  
approx. 15 seconds after the locking. The interior and the towing protection moni-  
toring are activated approx. 30 seconds after the locking. If a door is opened dur-  
ing activation, the monitoring is only activated 5 seconds after closing.  
WARNING  
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti-  
vated, there must not be any person in the vehicle as it is then not possible to  
open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked doors make it  
more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!  
How is the alarm system deactivated?  
Note  
Operate the radio remote control only when the doors and boot lid are closed  
and you have visual contact with the vehicle.  
Once in the car, you must not press the lock button of the radio remote con-  
The alarm system is deactivated by pressing the unlock button on the radio re-  
mote control. The anti-theft alarm system is reactivated if the vehicle is not  
opened within 30 seconds after transmitting the radio signal.  
trol before inserting the key into the ignition lock in order to avoid the car being  
inadvertently locked and the alarm system being switched on. Should this happen,  
press the unlock button of the radio remote control.  
The alarm system is also deactivated if you unlock the vehicle door using the key  
within 45 seconds after locking the vehicle.  
£
The automatic raising of the small boot lid can be impaired at temperatures  
below +4 °C.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
46 Unlocking and locking  
Once you unlock the vehicle by inserting the key into the driver door within 45  
seconds, you then have to insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the igni-  
tion on within 15 seconds after unlocking the door in order to deactivate the alarm  
system. The alarm will be triggered if you do not switch on the ignition within 15  
seconds.  
Interior monitor and towing protection monitoring   
The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and then  
triggers the alarm.  
When is the alarm triggered?  
The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored:  
Bonnet,  
Boot lid,  
Doors,  
Ignition lock,  
Vehicle inclination ⇒ꢀpage 46,  
Vehicle interior⇒ꢀpage 46,  
A drop in voltage of the on-board power supply,  
Socket of the factory-fitted towing device.  
Fig. 26 Button for interior monitor and  
towing protection monitoring  
Switch off the interior monitor and towing protection monitoring  
Switch off the ignition.  
Open the driver door.  
An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is discon-  
nected while the anti-theft alarm system is activated.  
Press the button at the centre column on the driver side ⇒ꢀfig. 26, the sym-  
bol which lights up in the button changes from red to orange.  
How is the alarm switched off?  
You switch the alarm off if you unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control or  
if you switch the ignition on.  
Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.  
Note  
The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are switched on again  
automatically the next time the car is locked.  
The working life of the alarm siren is 6 years. More detailed information is  
available by a specialist garage.  
Before leaving the car, check that all the doors, windows and the electric slid-  
ing/tilting roof are properly closed in order to ensure that the anti-theft alarm sys-  
tem is fully operational.  
Note  
You can switch the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring off if  
there is a possibility that movements from (e.g. children or animals) inside the ve-  
hicle interior or if the vehicle must be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed,  
might trigger the alarm.  
Coding of the radio remote control and the receiver unit precludes the use of  
the radio remote control from other vehicles.  
The opened storage compartment for spectacles reduces the effectiveness of  
the interior monitor. In order to ensure the function of the interior monitor to be  
fully operational, always close the storage compartment for spectacles before  
locking the vehicle.  
Unlocking and locking 47  
S
Safety switch  
Power windows  
Safety pushbutton  
Buttons on the driver's door  
You can deactivate the buttons for power windows at rear doors by pressing the  
S
safety pushbutton  
⇒ꢀfig. 27. The buttons for power windows at rear doors are  
S
activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton  
again.  
If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated, the indicator light in the safe-  
S
ty switch  
lights up.  
WARNING  
If you lock the vehicle from the outside, do not leave any person in the ve-  
hicle since it is no longer possible to open the windows from the inside in an  
emergency.  
Fig. 27 Buttons on the driver's door  
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ꢀpage 48. If there is an obstacle,  
the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centime-  
tres. You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may  
otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example,  
jammed in the window!  
The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on.  
Opening a window  
A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the door.  
The process stops when one releases the button.  
It is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power windows  
S
in the rear doors (safety pushbutton)  
transported on the rear seats.  
⇒ꢀfig. 27 when children are being  
Additionally you can open the window automatically (fully opened) by pressing  
the button up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window  
to stop immediately.  
CAUTION  
Keep the window glass clean to ensure correct function of the electric win-  
Closing a window  
dows.  
A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in the  
door. The closing process stops when one releases the button.  
In the event of a freezing up of the windscreen, first of all eliminate the ice  
⇒ꢀpage 191 and then operate the power windows otherwise the power window  
Additionally you can close the window automatically (fully closed) by pulling  
the button up to the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window  
to stop immediately.  
mechanism could be damaged.  
Note  
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows  
The switches for the individual windows are located in the armrest for the driver  
⇒ꢀfig. 27, front passenger and in the rear doors ⇒ꢀfig. 28.  
for a further 10 minutes. The automatic window closing will not operate during  
this time. The power windows are switched off completely once you open the  
driver or front passenger door.  
Buttons for the power windows in the armrest for the driver  
When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventilation  
A
B
C
Button for the power window in the driver's door  
Button for the power window in the front passenger's door  
Button for the power window at the rear right door  
Button for the power window at the rear left door  
system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are opened, dust  
as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more  
at certain speeds.  
D
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
48 Unlocking and locking  
Button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors  
Note  
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows for  
a further 10 minutes. The automatic closing and opening functions will not oper-  
ate during this time. The power windows are switched off completely once you  
open the driver or front passenger door.  
Force limiter of the power windows  
The electrically operated power windows are fitted with a force limiter. It reduces  
the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows.  
Fig. 28 Arrangement of the switch in a  
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down  
by several centimetres.  
rear door  
A button for the relevant window is provided in these doors.  
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec-  
onds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by  
several centimetres.  
Opening a window  
A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the door.  
The process stops when one releases the button.  
You must try to close the window once again within 10 seconds after the window  
has gone down twice, even if the obstacle was not yet removed, the closing proc-  
ess is stopped. During this time it is not possible to automatically close the win-  
dow. The force limiter is still switched on.  
Additionally you can open the window automatically (fully opened) by pressing  
the button up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window  
to stop immediately.  
The force limiter is only switched off, if you attempt to close the window within  
the next 10 seconds - the window closes now with full strength!  
Closing a window  
A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in the  
door. The closing process stops when one releases the button.  
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.  
Additionally you can close the window automatically (fully closed) by pulling  
the button up to the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window  
to stop immediately.  
WARNING  
You should take particular care when closing the windows! You may otherwise  
suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the  
window!  
WARNING  
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ꢀpage 48. If there is an obstacle,  
the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centime-  
tres. You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may  
otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example,  
jammed in the window!  
Window convenience operation  
You can open and close the electrically powered windows as follows when un-  
locking and locking the vehicle (only close the sliding/tilting roof or the panoramic  
sliding roof):  
£
Unlocking and locking 49  
Opening a window  
Operation in winter  
by holding the pressed unlock button on the remote control,  
by holding the pressed top part of the button for the central locking system in  
Ice accumulating on the surface of the windows during the winter may result in a  
greater resistance when closing the windows and the window may stop and move  
back several centimetres  
the driver door,  
It is necessary to put the force limiter out of operation in order to close the win-  
dow ⇒ꢀpage 48, Force limiter of the power windows.  
Closing a window  
by holding the pressed lock button on the remote control,  
by holding the pressed bottom part of the button for the central locking sys-  
WARNING  
tem in the driver door,  
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ꢀpage 48. If there is an obstacle, the  
closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres.  
You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may oth-  
erwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jam-  
med in the window!  
by holding the key in the driver's lock in the lock position ⇒ꢀpage 38,  
2
on the KESSY system, by covering the sensor  
⇒ꢀfig. 14.  
You can interrupt the opening or closing operation of the windows immediately by  
releasing the key or the lock button.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Keep the window glass clean to ensure correct function of the electric win-  
dows.  
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ꢀpage 48. If there is an obstacle, the  
closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres.  
You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may oth-  
erwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jam-  
med in the window!  
In the event of a freezing up of the windscreen, first of all eliminate the ice  
⇒ꢀpage 191 and then operate the power windows otherwise the power window  
mechanism could be damaged.  
Note  
The convenience opening of the windows with the aid of the key in the driver's  
lock is only possible within 45 seconds after deactivating or activating the alarm  
system.  
Electric sliding/tilting roof  
Description  
Operational faults  
Electrically operated power windows do not operate  
If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected while the window was  
opened, the electrically operated power windows do not operate. The system  
must be activated. Proceed as follows in order to re-establish the function:  
switch on the ignition,  
you can close the window by pulling the respective switch on the top edge,  
release the switch,  
Fig. 29 Control dial for the power slid-  
ing/tilting roof  
you must pull the respective switch again in upward direction for approx. 3  
seconds.  
The sliding/tilting roof is operated by means of the control dial ⇒ꢀfig. 29 and only  
£
functions when the ignition is switched on. The control dial has several positions.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
50 Unlocking and locking  
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open, close and tilt the sliding/  
tilting roof for approx. 10 minutes. It is no longer possible to operate the sliding/  
tilting roof after opening one of the front doors, however.  
Safety closing  
The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. If an obstacle (e.g. ice) pre-  
vents closing, the sliding/tilting roof stops and opens completely. You can close  
the sliding/tilting roof completely without force limiter by pressing the switch to  
A
Note  
the  
position ⇒ꢀfig. 29 at the front for as long as it takes for the sliding/tilting  
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the slid-  
ing/tilting roof does not close fully. Here you have to set the control dial to the  
roof to close completely ⇒ꢀ  
.
A
switch position  
and press it forward for about 10 seconds.  
WARNING  
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury!  
Opening and tilting  
Convenience operation  
Comfort position  
C
Turn the switch to position  
⇒ꢀfig. 29.  
You can also close an open sliding/tilting roof from the outside.  
Opening fully  
Turn the switch to position  
position).  
Keep the lock button on the radio remote control pressed or hold the key in  
B
and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned  
the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position, or when using the  
1
KESSY system keep your finger on the sensor  
⇒ꢀfig. 14 until the sliding/tilt-  
ing roof is closed ⇒ꢀ  
.
Tilting roof  
Turn the switch to position  
D
.
The closing operation stops when one releases the key or the lock button.  
When the sliding/tilting roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the wind  
noise is much less.  
WARNING  
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury! The force limiter does not  
operate with the convenience closing.  
The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open.  
CAUTION  
It may be necessary during winter to remove any ice and snow in the area of the  
sliding/tilting roof before opening it in order to prevent damaging the opening  
mechanism.  
Electric sliding/tilting roof with solar cells  
If there is sufficient bright sunlight, the solar cells on the sliding/tilting roof deliver  
power for the fresh air blower. Further information ⇒ꢀpage 103.  
Closing  
The operation of the sliding/tilting roof with solar cells is the same as of a normal  
sliding/tilting roof.  
Sliding closed/closing the sliding/tilting roof  
A
Turn the switch to position  
⇒ꢀfig. 29.  
Unlocking and locking 51  
Emergency operation  
Panoramic sliding roof (Combi)  
Introduction  
The panoramic sliding roof with sun screen can only be operated with the control  
dial when the ignition is switched on ⇒ꢀfig. 31. The control dial has several posi-  
tions.  
After switching off the ignition, it is still possible to open, close and tilt the panor-  
amic sliding roof or the sun screen for approx. 10 minutes. However, it is no longer  
possible to operate the panoramic sliding roof and the sun screen the moment  
you open one of the front doors.  
Fig. 30 Detail of the headliner/key-operated positioning point  
Opening and tilting the panoramic sliding roof  
You can close and/or open the sliding/tilting roof by hand if the system is defec-  
tive. The manual control for the roof is located underneath the cover of the elec-  
tric drive, or underneath the glasses storage box, ⇒ꢀfig. 30 - left, depending on the  
equipment fitted to your vehicle.  
Open the glasses storage box ⇒ꢀpage 94.  
Carefuly insert a screwdriver, approximately 5 mm wide into the slot in the po-  
sitions shown by the arrows ⇒ꢀfig. 30 - left.  
Carefully fold the cover and glasses storage box downwards by gently press-  
ing down and turning the screwdriver.  
Fig. 31 Control dial for the panoramic  
sliding roof  
Insert an Allen key, Group 4, up to the stop into the opening at the point of the  
arrow ⇒ꢀfig. 30- right, and close and/or open the roof.  
Refit the cover/glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs before  
pushing the entire part upwards.  
Comfort position  
C
Turn the switch to position  
⇒ꢀfig. 31.  
Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.  
Open partially  
Turn the switch to a position in area  
D
.
Note  
Open fully  
Turn the switch to position  
position).  
It is necessary after each emergency operation to move the sliding/tilting roof into  
B
and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned  
the basic position. Here you have to turn the control dial forward to the switch po-  
A
sition  
⇒ꢀfig. 29 and press for about 10 seconds.  
Tilting and closing  
In order to tilt, press the switch on the recess in the direction of the roof.  
In order to close, press down the switch on the recess and then push it for-  
wards.  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
52 Unlocking and locking  
When the panoramic sliding roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the  
wind noise is reduced.  
Opening  
E
Briefly press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 32 in order to fully open.  
and hold it pressed in order to open in the desired posi-  
tion. The opening process stops when one releases the button.  
E
Press the button  
CAUTION  
It may be necessary during winter to remove any ice and snow in the area of the  
panoramic sliding roof before opening it, in order to prevent damaging the open-  
ing mechanism.  
Closing  
F
Briefly press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 32 in order to fully close.  
and hold it pressed in order to close in the desired posi-  
tion. The closing process stops when one releases the button.  
F
Press the button  
Closing the panoramic sliding roof  
Closing  
Convenience operation  
A
Turn the switch to position  
⇒ꢀfig. 31.  
The panoramic sliding roof and the sun screen can also be operated from the out-  
Force limiter  
side using the remote control key or when using the KESSY system with the aid of  
1
The panoramic sliding roof is fitted with a force limiter. The panoramic sliding roof  
stops and moves back several centimetres when it cannot be closed because  
there is something in the way (e.g. ice). You can close the panoramic sliding roof  
fully without force limiter by pressing down the switch on the recess and then  
the sensor  
⇒ꢀfig. 14.  
Closing the panoramic sliding roof  
Hold down the lock button on the remote control key, or when using the KES-  
1
ing roof is closed. The panoramic sliding roof and the sun screen are closed to-  
gether.  
pushing it forwards until the panoramic sliding roof is fully closed ⇒ꢀ  
.
SY system keep your finger on the sensor  
⇒ꢀfig. 14, until the panoramic slid-  
WARNING  
Carefully close the panoramic sliding roof - risk of injury!  
1
After releasing the button, or lifting your finger off the sensor  
KESSY system, the closing process is immediately interrupted.  
when using the  
Opening and closing the sun screen  
Tilting the panoramic sliding roof  
Hold down the unlock button on the remote control key until the panoramic  
sliding roof is tilted. When tilting the panoramic sliding roof, the sun screen  
opens at the same time.  
Note  
The force limiter also operates for convenience closing.  
The panoramic sliding roof can only be tilted but not opened when the con-  
venience operating feature is being used.  
Fig. 32 Buttons for sun screen  
You can open or close the sun screen separately with the aid of the buttons  
⇒ꢀfig. 32.  
Unlocking and locking 53  
After initialising the panoramic sliding roof, press down the switch on the recess  
and push it forwards for approx. 10 seconds.  
Emergency operation  
F
Press the switch  
screen.  
⇒ꢀfig. 32 for approx. 10 seconds in order to initialise the sun  
If the panoramic sliding roof or the sun screen is not fully closed while disconnect-  
ing and reconnecting the battery, first of all the panoramic sliding roof or the sun  
screen must be closed ⇒ꢀpage 52, Closing the panoramic sliding roof ⇒ꢀpage 52,  
Opening and closing the sun screen. Only then the initialisation can be performed.  
Fig. 33 Detail of the headliner/key-operated positioning point  
You can close and/or open the panoramic sliding roof by hand if the system is de-  
fective. The manual control for the panoramic sliding roof is located underneath  
the cover of the electric drive, or underneath the glasses storage box, ⇒ꢀfig. 33 -  
left, depending on the equipment fitted to your vehicle.  
Open the glasses storage box ⇒ꢀpage 94.  
Carefuly insert a screwdrive, approximately 5 mm wide into the slot in the po-  
A
sitions shown by the arrows  
⇒ꢀfig. 33.  
Carefully fold the cover and glasses storage box downwards by gently press-  
ing down and turning the screwdriver.  
B
Insert an Allen key, Group 4, up to the stop into the opening  
open the panoramic sliding roof.  
and close or  
Refit the cover/glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs before  
pushing the entire part upwards.  
Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.  
Note  
After each emergency operation, it is necessary to initialise the roof ⇒ꢀpage 53,  
Initialising the panoramic sliding roof.  
Initialising the panoramic sliding roof  
After disconnecting and reconnecting the battery, the panoramic sliding roof and  
the sun screen must be initialised.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
54 Lights and Visibility  
Lights and Visibility  
Lights  
WARNING  
Never drive with only the side lights on - risk of accident! The side lights are  
not bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen  
by other oncoming traffic. In this case, always switch on the low beam when it  
is dark or if visibility is poor.  
Switching lights on and off   
Note  
If the light switch is in the position , the ignition key is removed and the  
driver's door is open, an acoustic warning signal will sound. The acoustic warning  
signal is switched off over the door contact when the driver's door is closed (igni-  
tion off). The vehicle can be parked with the side lights on.  
If the light switch is in the position and the ignition key is removed, the  
lights will go out.  
If the car is parked for a lengthy period, we recommend switching off all lights,  
or leaving only the parking lights switched on.  
The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accord-  
ance with the legal requirements.  
Fig. 34 Dash panel: Light switch  
Switching on side lights  
Turn the light switch ⇒ꢀfig. 34 into position .  
Switching on the low beam and main beam  
If a fault occurs in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically  
Turn the light switch into position .  
In the event of cool or humid weather conditions, the headlights can be misted  
up from inside.  
Push the main beam lever slightly forward in the spring-tensioned position in  
The temperature difference between interior and external area of the head-  
order to switch on the main beam ⇒ꢀfig. 40.  
light lenses is decisive.  
Switching off lights (except daylight driving lights)  
Turn the light switch into position.  
When the driving lights are switched on, the light outlet surfaces are free  
from mist after a short period. The headlight lenses can possibly mist up at the  
border areas.  
When the parking lights are switched on, the symbol next to the light switch is  
illuminated.  
It also concerns reverse light and turn signal lights.  
This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system.  
The dipped beam continues to shine while the ignition is switched on and the  
light switch is in the position or . After switching off the ignition, the low  
beam is switched off automatically and only the side lights come on. The parking  
light also goes out after the ignition key is removed.  
“DAY LIGHT”  
Switching on daylight driving lights  
On models fitted with right-hand steering the position of certain switches differs  
from that shown in ⇒ꢀfig. 34. The symbols which mark the switch positions are  
identical, however.  
Switch on the ignition without turning the light switch out of the position 0 or  
£
.  
Lights and Visibility 55  
Deactivating the function daylight driving lights  
Switching off automatic driving lamp control  
Turn the light switch to the position 0, or .  
Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel within 3 seconds af-  
ter switching on the ignition and at the same time, slide it to the bottom and  
hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds.  
If the light switch is in the position , the symbol illuminates when the ignition  
is switched on  next to the light switch. If the low beam is activated with the  
light sensor, the symbol illuminates additionally next to the light switch.  
Activating the function daylight driving lights  
Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel within 3 seconds af-  
ter switching on the ignition and at the same time, slide it towards the top and  
hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds.  
If the light comes on automatically, the side lights and low beam as well as licence  
plate light light up at the same time.  
If the automatic light control is switched on, the light is regulated with the light  
sensor in the rear mirror holder. If the light intensity drops below the set value, e.g  
when driving during the day into a tunnel, the low beam and the side lights as  
well as the licence plate light come on automatically. If the light intensity increa-  
ses again, the lights switch off automatically.  
On vehicles fitted with an information display, you can also activate or deactivate  
in the menu the function daylight driving lights:  
Settings  
Lights & Vision  
Motorway lights  
On vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights in the fog lights, the  
parking lights and the licence plate light do not come on when activating the  
function daylight driving lights (neither front nor rear).  
If the automatic light control has been switched on and the vehicle speed is over  
140 km/h for at least 10 seconds, the side lights and low beam are switched on  
automatically.  
In some countries, the national legal provisions require that the rear parking lights  
also come on together with the separate lights for daylight driving lights when ac-  
tivating the function daylight driving lights.  
If the vehicle speed is below 65 km/h for at least 2 minutes, the lights are switch-  
ed off.  
When the daylight driving lights are switched on, the lighting of the instrument  
cluster is switched on as well.  
Rain lights  
If you move the windshield wiper lever in the position slow wipe for more than 5  
seconds, the side lights and low beam are automatically switched on. The light is  
switched off when the windshield wiper lever is no longer than 4 minutes in the  
position for slow or intermittent wipe.  
Automatic driving lamp control  
If you switch on the windscreen wipe in the operation rain sensor for longer than  
10 seconds or in the operation permanent wipe (position 2 or 3) ⇒ꢀpage 66  
switching on for longer than 15 seconds, the side lights and low beam are switch-  
ed on automatically. The light switches off if the windscreen wipe is in operation  
rain sensor for more than around 4 minutes or is not switched on in the operation  
permanent wipe.  
WARNING  
The automatic light control only operates as a support. The driver is not re-  
leased from his responsibility to inspect the light and if necessary to switch on  
the light depending on the light conditions. The light sensor cannot detect for  
example rain or snow. For these conditions we recommend to switch on the  
low beam !  
Fig. 35 Dash panel: Light switch  
Switching on automatic driving lamp control  
Turn the light switch ⇒ꢀfig. 35 into position .  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
56 Lights and Visibility  
Note  
Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors,  
Licence plate light.  
Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair  
its function or put it out of operation.  
The same principles as for using the automatic light control also apply to the  
Coming Home Function  
The lights go out 10 seconds after closing all the doors and the boot lid.  
light which is switched on manually ⇒ꢀpage 54.  
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the lights go out 60 seconds after switching  
off the ignition.  
Parking light  
On vehicles fitted with automatic driving lamp control you can also switch the  
light switch in the position . The function Coming Home is controlled with the  
light sensor in the mount of the interior rear mirror. If the light intensity is higher  
than the set value of the light sensor, the Coming Home Function is not switched  
on after switching off the ignition.  
Parking light   
Switch off the ignition.  
Pull the turn signal light lever ⇒ꢀfig. 40 upwards or downwards - the parking  
light on the right and left side of the vehicle will be switched on respectively.  
Note  
The parking light only operates if the ignition is switched off.  
If the Coming Home Function is switched on constantly, the battery will be  
heavily discharged particularly in short-haul traffic.  
The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accord-  
ance with the legal requirements.  
You can change the illumination period for the Leaving Home Function by  
If you have switched on the right or left turn signal light and you switch off the  
ignition, the parking light is not automatically switched on.  
Parking light on both sides  
Turn the light switch into the position and lock the vehicle.  
means of the Information display.  
Coming Home Function  
Leaving Home Function  
The function makes it possible to switch on the lights in the darkness for a short  
time after leaving the vehicle.  
This function makes it possible to switch on the lights when approaching the ve-  
hicle.  
Switching on Coming Home Function  
Switching on Leaving Home Function  
The light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control  and the  
After leaving the vehicle, the light switch is in the position automatic driving  
low beam illuminates.  
lamp control .  
Switch off the ignition.  
Unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control - the lights come on.  
After opening the driver's door, the function Coming Home is switched on.  
Depending on equipment fitted the function Leaving Home switches on the fol-  
lowing lights:  
Close all the doors and the boot lid and lock the vehicle. After a short time,  
switch all lights off.  
Parking lights,  
Low beam,  
Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors,  
Licence plate light.  
Depending on equipment fitted the function Coming Home switches on the fol-  
lowing lights:  
Parking lights,  
Low beam,  
£
Lights and Visibility 57  
Leaving Home Function  
Mode out of town  
The function Leaving Home is controlled with the light sensor in the mount of the  
interior rear mirror. If the light intensity is higher than the set value of the light  
sensor, the Leaving Home Function is not switched on after unlocking the vehicle  
with the radio remote control.  
The mode “out of town” is a basic mode. The dispersion of the cone of light in  
front of the vehicle is similar to the low beam. The mode is active if none of the  
following modes are active.  
Mode rain  
After unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control, the lights come on for  
10 seconds. The Leaving Home Function is also switched off after the ignition is  
switched on and after locking the vehicle.  
In the mode “rain” the dispersion of the cone of light in front of the vehicle is wid-  
er and the width of illumination is shorter, so that during bad weather (rain) the  
dazzling of the oncoming drivers can be reduced. The mode is activated at speeds  
of 15 - 70 km/h and if the windscreen wipers continuously operate for a period of  
time longer than 2 minutes. The mode is deactivated when dropping below or ex-  
ceeding the set speed limit or if the windscreen wipers have been switched off for  
a period of time longer than 8 minutes.  
If no door is opened within 30 seconds, the lights go out and the vehicle is locked  
automatically.  
Note  
If the Leaving Home Function is switched on constantly, the battery will be  
heavily discharged particularly in short-haul traffic.  
The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accord-  
ance with the legal requirements.  
You can change the illumination period for the Leaving Home Function by  
Mode city  
In the mode “city”, the dispersion of the cone of light in front of the vehicle is wid-  
er and the width of illumination is shorter. It has as an aim to illuminate the adja-  
cent footpaths, crossings, pedestrian crossings etc. The mode is active at speeds  
of 15 - 50 km/h.  
means of the Information display.  
Mode motorway  
In the mode “motorway” the dispersion of the cone of light is so widespread, that  
it illuminates also the left (and right) lane of the motorway, so that the driver  
Adaptive headlights (AHL)  
1)  
can react in time to an obstacle or any other danger. The mode is activated step-  
wise as of a speed of 90 km/h. It gains its greatest effectiveness at speeds above  
120 km/h.  
Switch on the adaptive headlights  
Turn the light switch ⇒ꢀfig. 35 into position .  
The AHL system is activated if:  
Tourist light  
the light sensor recognizes the low light intensity,  
no reverse gear is engaged,  
the operation “tourist light” is not switched on.  
This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system,  
driving on the left/right, without dazzling the oncoming vehicles. When the mode  
“tourist light” is active, the above mentioned modes and the side to side swivel of  
the headlight is deactivated.  
The light sensor switches on the full outer illumination at low light intensity.  
The mode “tourist light” is activated/deactivated via the Information display in the  
menu:  
System AHL makes it possible to change the length and width of illumination of  
the headlight. The length and width of illumination changes automatically in rela-  
tion to the vehicle speed and the use of the windscreen wiper.  
Settings  
Travel mode  
System AHL operates in the following modes.  
Off  
£
Switched on  
1)  
It is valid for vehicles which are designed for driving on the left.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
58 Lights and Visibility  
Cornering lights  
The warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are  
switched on ⇒ꢀpage 22.  
The cornering lights are used to illuminate the curves by means of the cone of  
light swiveling together with the front headlight with Xenon lights. This function  
is active when the speed of the car increases to more than 10km/h.  
Fog lights with the function “CORNER”  
The fog lights with the function “CORNER” are designed for a bet-  
ter illumination of the surrounding area near the vehicle when  
corning, parking etc.  
WARNING  
If the cornering lights are defective, the headlights are automatically lowered  
to the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming  
traffic. Thus the illuminated length of the road is shortened. Drive carefully  
and have the car inspected immediately by a specialist garage.  
The fog lights with the function “CORNER” are adjusted according to the steering  
1)  
angle or after switching on the turn signal light in the following circumstances:  
Note  
the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running or it moves with a speed of  
The AHL system complements the functions of the fog lights with the function  
“CORNER” ⇒ꢀpage 58 and the function of the dynamic headlamp beam adjust-  
maximum 40 km/h,  
the daylight driving lights are not switched on,  
the low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position  and the  
ment.  
The System AHL is solely delivered with Bi-Xenon gas discharge bulbs for low  
beam and main beam lights.  
intensity of the ambient light causes the low beam to be switched on,  
the fog lights are not switched on,  
no reverse gear is engaged.  
Fog lights   
Note  
If you engage the reverse gear during the active function “CORNER”, both fog  
lights illuminate.  
Rear fog light   
Switching on the rear fog light  
First of all turn the light switch into position or ⇒ꢀfig. 36.  
2
Pull the switch into position  
.
Fig. 36 Dash panel: Light switch  
The warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light is  
switched on ⇒ꢀpage 22.  
Only the rear fog light of the trailer lights up if the vehicle has a factory-fitted  
towing device or a towing device from ŠKODA original accessories and when you  
are towing a trailer which is fitted with the rear fog light.  
Switch on the front fog lamp  
First of all turn the light switch into position or ⇒ꢀfig. 36.  
1
Pull the light switch into position  
.
£
1)  
If both switch on versions are conflicting, for example if the steering wheel is turned to the left and  
the right turn signal light is switched on, the turn signal light has the higher priority.  
Lights and Visibility 59  
Headlamp range adjustment   
CAUTION  
The rear fog light should only be switched on if visibility is particularly poor (con-  
form with any varying legal provisions) to avoid dazzling vehicles behind your ve-  
hicle.  
Once the low beam is switched on you can then adapt the range of  
the headlights to the load of the vehicle.  
Instrument lighting   
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting.  
Fig. 38 Dash panel: Lights and Visibility  
Turn the control dial ⇒ꢀfig. 38 until you have adjusted the low beam so that  
oncoming traffic is not dazzled.  
Fig. 37 Dash panel: Instrument lighting  
Settings  
The positions correspond approximately to the following vehicle loads:  
Instrument lighting  
-
1
Front seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.  
All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.  
All seats occupied, luggage compartment laden.  
Driver seat occupied, luggage compartment laden.  
Switch on the light.  
Turn the control dial ⇒ꢀfig. 37 to the desired intensity of the instrument light-  
2
3
ing.  
The illumination intensity of the Information display ⇒ꢀpage 17 is set automatically.  
It is only possible to adjust the instrument lighting with the control dial if the light  
intensity drops below the set value of the light sensor.  
CAUTION  
Headlamp range adjustment should always be adjusted in a way that:  
it does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming traffic,  
and the range is sufficient for safe driving.  
Note  
The Bi-Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the vehi-  
cle (e.g. speed, accelerating, braking) when the ignition is switched on and when  
driving. Vehicles which are not equipped with Bi-Xenon bulbs do not have a man-  
ual headlight range adjustment control.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
60 Lights and Visibility  
Switch for hazard warning lights   
The turn signal   and main beam lever   
The parking lights and headlight flasher are also switched on and  
off using the turn signal and main beam lever.  
Fig. 39 Dash panel: Switch for hazard  
warning lights  
Press switch ⇒ꢀfig. 39 to switch the hazard warning light system on or off.  
Fig. 40 Turn signal and main beam lever  
All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard  
warning light system is switched on. The indicator light for the turn signals and  
the indicator light in the switch also flash at the same time. You can also switch  
on the hazard warning light system if the ignition is switched off.  
The turn signal and main beam lever perform the following functions:  
Right and left turn signal light  
A
B
Push the lever upwards  
or downwards ⇒ꢀfig. 40  
.
The hazard warning light system is switched on automatically if an airbag is de-  
ployed in the event of an accident.  
If you only wish to flash three times (the so-called convenience turn signal),  
push the lever briefly up to the upper or lower pressure point and release it.  
This function can be activated/deactivated in the Information display  
⇒ꢀpage 19.  
Please comply with any legal requirements when using the hazard warning light  
system.  
Note  
Turn signal for changing lanes - in order to only flash briefly, move the lever up  
or down to the pressure point and hold it in this position.  
Switch on the hazard warning light system if, for example:  
you encounter traffic congestion,  
Main beam   
your vehicle breaks down or an emergency situation occurs.  
Switch on the low beam.  
Push the lever forwards in direction of arrow  
C
(spring-tensioned position).  
D
If you push the lever towards the steering wheel in direction of arrow  
(spring-tensioned position) the main beam is switched off.  
Headlight flasher   
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel (spring-tensioned position) in direc-  
D
tion of arrow  
ter come on.  
- the main beam and warning light in the instrument clus-  
Parking light   
For a description of the operation, see ⇒ꢀpage 56, Parking light.  
£
Lights and Visibility 61  
Information concerning the function of the lights.  
The turn signal system only operates when the ignition is switched on. The  
corresponding warning light or in the instrument cluster also flashes.  
Operating the lights with the door contact switch  
Position the switch into middle position. On vehicles without interior monitor,  
the middle position is marked with a symbol ⇒ꢀfig. 41 - left.  
If operating lights with the door contact switch is enabled, the light will come on  
when:  
The turn signal is automatically cancelled after negotiating a curve.  
The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb of the turn signal  
light fails.  
the vehicle is unlocked,  
one of the doors is opened,  
or the ignition key is removed.  
The side light and rear light on the appropriate side of the vehicle are switched  
on when the parking light is selected. The parking light only operates if the igni-  
tion is switched off.  
If operating lights with the door contact switch is enabled, the light will go off  
when:  
CAUTION  
Use main beam or the headlight flasher only if this does not risk dazzling other  
road users.  
the vehicle is locked,  
the ignition is switched on,  
about 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.  
Note  
Use only in accordance with the legal requirements the described lighting and sig-  
nal systems.  
If a door remains open, or if switch is in position the inter lighting goes out af-  
ter 10 minutes to prevent the battery from discharging.  
Note  
Interior lighting  
Two diffuse lights are integrated in the interior lighting, which illuminates the  
shift lever and the middle of the dash panel. They are switched on automatically  
when switching on the parking light.  
Vehicle interior lighting  
Furthermore, after switching on the ignition when the parking lights are  
switched on, the door handle lighting comes on.  
We recommend having these bulbs replaced by a specialist garage.  
Front reading lights  
Fig. 41 Front vehicle interior lighting  
Switching on the interior lighting  
Press the switch at the point of the symbol ⇒ꢀfig. 41.  
Switching off the interior lighting  
Press the switch at the point of the symbol O.  
Fig. 42 Reading lights  
General Maintenance  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
62 Lights and Visibility  
Front reading lights  
Vehicle interior lighting rear (Combi)  
Press switch ⇒ꢀfig. 42 to switch the reading lights on/off.  
Valid for vehicles which are fitted with a panoramic sliding roof.  
Lighting of the storage compartment on front passenger side  
When opening the flap of the storage compartment on the front passenger  
side the lighting in the storage compartment comes on.  
The light switches on automatically when the parking light is switched on and  
goes out when the flap is closed.  
Vehicle interior lighting and rear reading lights  
Fig. 44 Rear vehicle interior lighting  
Switching on the interior lighting  
Press the cover glass in the area of the symbol ⇒ꢀfig. 44.  
Switching off the interior lighting  
Press the cover glass in the area of the symbol O.  
Operating the lights with the door contact switch  
Position the cover glass into middle position .  
Fig. 43 Interior lighting and rear reading  
lights  
Front door warning light  
Interior lighting  
The rear interior lighting is operated together with the front interior lighting  
⇒ꢀpage 61.  
Reading lights  
Press switch ⇒ꢀfig. 43 to switch the reading lights on/off.  
Fig. 45 Front door: Warning light  
£
The warning light is located in the door trim panel below ⇒ꢀfig. 45.  
Lights and Visibility 63  
The warning light goes on every time the door is opened. The light goes out about  
10 minutes after opening the door in order to avoid discharging the battery of the  
vehicle.  
Luggage compartment light (Combi)  
Removeable lamp  
There is a reflector installed on some vehicles instead of the warning light.  
Entry lighting  
The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror.  
The light beam is directed towards the entry area of the front door.  
The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the boot lid.  
The light goes out after switching on the ignition or up to 30 seconds after closing  
all the doors or the boot lid.  
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the light goes out within 2 minutes if the  
ignition is switched off.  
Fig. 46 Removeable lamp  
A removeable lamp is fitted on the left side of the luggage compartment. This  
lamp has two functions:  
WARNING  
If the entry light comes on, do not touch its cover - risk of burns!  
B
Lighting of the luggage compartment - it illuminates part  
lamp is in the holder),  
Portable lamp - it illuminates part  
holder).  
⇒ꢀfig. 46 (the  
C
(the lamp has been removed from the  
Luggage compartment light  
The lighting comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened. If the lid remains  
open for more than about 10 minutes, the luggage compartment lighting switches  
off automatically.  
If the lamp is in the holder, it is automatically switched on after opening the boot  
lid. If the boot lid remains open for more than 10 minutes, the light switches off  
automatically.  
The lamp is supplied by three rechargeable batteries type AAA with a capacity of  
600 mAh. The rechargeable batteries are constantly charged when the engine is  
running. It takes approx. 3 hours to fully charge the rechargeable batteries.  
The lamp is fitted with magnets. Therefore it is possible to attach the lamp, for  
example on the vehicle body, after removing it.  
Taking out the lamp  
Taking out the lamp  
D
Grasp the lamp at the points of the arrows  
⇒ꢀfig. 46 and swivel it in the di-  
E
£
rection of arrow  
.
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
64 Lights and Visibility  
Placing the lamp again in its holder  
CAUTION  
First of all place the lamp, which is switched off, in the holder on the side fac-  
ing the boot lid and then press on the lamp from the other side until it is heard  
to lock in place.  
We recommend having the faulty rechargeable batteries replaced by a specialist  
garage. If the lamp is not correctly opened, it can be damaged.  
For the sake of the environment  
Dispose of the faulty rechargeable batteries in accordance with environmental  
regulations.  
Operation of the lamp  
A
A
A
If you press the button  
If you press the button  
If you press the button  
once, the lamp lights up with 100 % light intensity.  
again, the lamp lights up with 50 % light intensity.  
once again, the lamp goes out.  
Note  
Pay attention to the correct polarity when replacing the rechargeable batter-  
CAUTION  
ies.  
The removeable lamp is not watertight and therefore must be protected against  
moisture.  
The replacement rechargeable batteries must have the same specification as  
the original rechargeable batteries. If other types of rechargeable batteries are  
used, the power output can be reduced and it can lead to a malfunction of the  
lamp.  
Note  
If the lamp is not correctly inserted in the holder, it does not light up when  
opening the boot lid and the rechargeable batteries are not charged.  
If the lamp is not switched off, however it is correctly inserted in the holder,  
C
Visibility  
the bulbs in the front part  
⇒ꢀfig. 46 of the lamp are automatically switched off.  
The removed light can operate for a max. of 24 hours at an intensity of 100 %  
Windscreen and rear window heater  
and a max.of 48 hours at an intensity of 50 %.  
Replacing the rechargeable batteries of the lamp  
You should proceed as follows if you wish to replace the faulty rechargeable bat-  
teries yourself:  
Take out the lamp.  
Lever off the cover of the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed  
F
object at the point of the lock-off clips  
⇒ꢀfig. 46.  
Remove the faulty rechargeable batteries from the lamp.  
Fig. 47 Switch for windscreen heater/switch for rear window heater  
Insert the new rechargeable batteries.  
Windscreen heater  
Insert the cover of the rechargeable batteries and press on it until it is heard  
to lock in place.  
You can switch the windscreen heater on or off by pressing the switch  
⇒ꢀfig. 47 - left, the indicator light in the switch comes on or goes out.  
WARNING  
Rear window heater  
You can switch the rear window heater on or off by pressing the switch  
⇒ꢀfig. 47 - right, the indicator light in the switch comes on or goes out.  
Pay particular attention when using the narrow and pointed object to change  
the rechargeable batteries - risk of injury.  
£
Lights and Visibility 65  
The windscreen and rear window heater only operates when the engine is run-  
ning.  
WARNING  
The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the deploy-  
ment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens etc. are  
attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head air-  
bag is deployed.  
The windscreen and rear window heater switches off automatically after 10 mi-  
nutes.  
For the sake of the environment  
As soon as the window is de-iced or free from mist, the heating should be switch-  
ed off. The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel  
economy ⇒ꢀpage 184, Saving electricity.  
Sun screen  
Note  
If the on-board voltage drops, the front and rear window heater switches off  
automatically, in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control  
⇒ꢀpage 208, Automatic consumer shut-off.  
The position and the shape of the switch for rear window heater can differ de-  
pending on the equipment installed in the vehicle.  
Sun visors  
Fig. 49 Unroll the sun screen  
The sun screen is located in the lower part of the luggage compartment cover.  
Pulling out  
A
Pull the sun screen at the handle  
⇒ꢀfig. 49 and hang it in the magnetic  
B
brackets  
.
Folding  
Take the sun screen out of the magnetic brackets  
B
and hold it at the handle  
so that it can roll up slowly and without damage into the housing on the  
A
luggage compartment cover.  
Fig. 48 Sun visor: Swivelling out - left/double sun visor: Swivelling back - right  
Note  
You can pull the sun visor for the driver or front passenger out of the fixture and  
1
Do not place any objects which can react sensitively to influences of magnetic  
fields (watches, electronics etc.) in the immediate area of the magnetic brackets.  
They can be damaged by the magnetic field.  
swivel it toward the door in the direction of the arrow  
⇒ꢀfig. 48.  
The vanity mirrors in the sun visors are provided with covers. When you slide open  
2
the cover in the direction of the arrow , the vanity mirror lighting in the headlin-  
er switches on automatically. It switches off again when you slide the cover closed  
or when you raise the sun visor.  
On vehicles which are equipped with double sun visor, you can also unfold the  
3
auxiliary visor in direction of arrow  
after swivelling the sun visor.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
66 Lights and Visibility  
The windscreen wiper lever ⇒ꢀfig. 51 has the following positions:  
Sun screen in the rear doors  
Finger-operated wiping  
If you wish to wipe the windscreen only briefly, push the lever into the sprung  
4
position . If you hold the lever in the lower position for more than 1 second,  
the wiper wipes faster.  
Intermittent wiping  
1
Position the lever up into position  
.
A
Set with the switch  
strokes.  
the desired break between the individual wiper  
Fig. 50 Rear door: Sun screen  
Slow wipe  
Position the lever up into position  
2
3
.
.
Pulling out  
A
Pull the sun screen at the handle  
top edge of the door.  
⇒ꢀfig. 50 and hang it in the bracket on the  
Fast wipe  
Position the lever up into position  
Folding  
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen  
A
Take the sun screen out at the handle  
roll up slowly and without damage.  
and hold it in such a way that it can  
5
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel into sprung position , the wash  
system sprays immediately, the windscreen wiper starts wiping a little later.  
The wash system and the windscreen wiper operate simultaneously at a  
speed of more than 120 km/h.  
Windshield wiper and wash system  
Release the lever. The windscreen wash system stops and the wiper contin-  
ues for another 3 - 4 wiper strokes (depending on the period of spraying of the  
windscreen). At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5  
seconds after the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the  
windscreen. This function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.  
Windshield wiper  
You can operate the windscreen wipers and automatic wipe/wash  
using the windscreen wiper lever.  
Rain sensor  
1
Move the lever into position  
.
A
You can set the sensitivity of the sensor individually with switch  
.
Wiping the rear window pane (Combi)  
6
Push the lever away from the steering wheel into position  
wiper will operate every 6 seconds.  
- the widescreen  
£
Fig. 51 Windscreen wiper lever  
Lights and Visibility 67  
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window pane (Combi)  
WARNING  
7
Press the lever from the steering wheel forward into the sprung position  
,
Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visibil-  
ity and safe driving ⇒ꢀpage 68.  
Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without  
the wash system sprays immediately, the windscreen wiper starts wiping a lit-  
tle later. As long as you hold the lever in this position, the wiper operates as  
well as the wash system.  
heating the windscreen beforehand. Otherwise the window cleaner could  
freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.  
Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the  
wiper to continue for another 2 - 3 wiper strokes (depending on the period of  
6
The rain sensor only operates as a support. The driver is not released from  
spraying of the windscreen). The lever will stay in position  
after releasing it.  
the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers manually de-  
pending on the visibility conditions.  
Switching windscreen wipers off  
Move the lever back into its home position  
0
.
CAUTION  
After the windscreen wiper switches off each time or the ignition switches off for  
the third time, the position of the windscreen wiper changes, this counteracts an  
early fatigue of the wiper rubbers.  
In cold temperatures and in winter, check before the trip or before switching  
on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen. Switching on windscreen  
wipers when the blades are frozen to the windscreen may result in damage both  
to the blades and the motor of the windscreen wipers!  
The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is switch-  
ed on and the bonnet is closed.  
If you switch off the ignition while the windscreen wipers are on, the wipers  
will sweep in the same mode the next time the ignition is switched on. At low  
temperatures, the wipers may freeze to the window between switching off the ig-  
nition and the next time you switch the ignition on again.  
The rear window wiper operates only if the boot lid is closed.  
If the intermittent wipe is switched on, the intervals are also controlled depending  
on speed.  
Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the front or rear window.  
Remove snow and ice from the window wipers before driving.  
The rain sensor automatically regulates the break between the individual wiper  
strokes depending on the intensity of the rain.  
Note  
If the slower  
The rear window will be wiped again if the front window wipers are on when re-  
verse gear is selected.  
2
3
⇒ꢀfig. 51 or the faster  
wiper setting is switched on and the  
vehicle speed decreases to below 4 km/h, the lower wiper step is switched on au-  
tomatically. At a speed increase of more than 8 km/h the previous wiper setting is  
established again.  
Top up with wash liquid ⇒ꢀpage 208.  
Winter position  
If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wiper will try to push away the  
If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from the  
windscreen. For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wipers in  
winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily.  
obstacle. If the obstacle continues to block the wiper, the wiper stops automati-  
cally after 5 attempts to eliminate the obstacle, in order to avoid a damage to the  
wiper. Remove the obstacle and and switch on the wiper again.  
You can set this rest position as follows:  
The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en-  
gine is running and the outside temperature is less than +10 °C.  
The content of the windscreen wiper reservoir is 3 litres. On vehicles which are  
Switch on the windscreen wipers.  
Switch off the ignition. The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which  
they were when switching off the ignition.  
equipped with a headlight cleaning system, the content of the reservoir is 5.5 li-  
tres. On vehicles fitted with auxiliary heating, the content of the windscreen wiper  
reservoir is 4.5 litres.  
You can also use the service position ⇒ꢀpage 68 as a winter position.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
68 Lights and Visibility  
The headlight washer nozzles are moved forward out of the bumper by the water  
pressure for cleaning the headlights.  
Automatic rear window wiper (Combi)  
2
3
If the windshield wiper is in positions  
⇒ꢀfig. 51 or  
the rear view window is  
You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the headlight len-  
ses at regular intervals, for example when refuelling. Please refer to the following  
guidelines ⇒ꢀpage 191, The headlight lenses.  
wiped every 30/10 seconds if the vehicle's speed exceeds 5 km/h.  
1
When the rain sensor is active (the lever is in the position ) the function is only  
active if the front window wipers continue to operate (no break between each  
wiping process).  
You should remove any snow from the fixtures of the washer nozzles and clear ice  
in winter with a de-icing spray in order to ensure proper operation of the cleaning  
system.  
Activation/deactivation  
CAUTION  
The function of the automatic rear window wiper is activated/deactivated in the  
information display in the menu:  
Never remove the nozzles from the headlamp cleaning system by hand - risk of  
damage!  
Settings  
Lights & Vision  
Rear wiper  
Replacing wiper blades for the windscreen wipers  
Note  
The function of the automatic rear window wiper is only valid for Combi vehicles  
which are equipped with an Iinformation display. The function is activated in the  
factory.  
Alternative park position of the rear window wiper (Combi)  
Each time after switching off the engine for the second time, the wiper blade of  
the rear window wiper is tilted. Thus, the life of the wiper blade is prolonged.  
Fig. 52 Wiper blade for the windscreen  
wiper  
Activation/deactivation  
One cannot fold out the wiper arms in the rest position from the windscreen. Be-  
fore replacing the wiper arms you must put them into the service position.  
Switch on the ignition.  
6
Push the operating level into the position  
within 5 seconds.  
⇒ꢀfig. 51 five times in succession  
Service position for changing wiper blades  
Close the bonnet.  
Switch off the ignition. After switching on the ignition again, the alternative  
park position of the rear window wiper is activated/deactivated.  
Switch the ignition on and then again off.  
Then press the windscreen wiper lever in the position  
seconds - the wiper arms move into the service position.  
4
⇒ꢀfig. 51 within 10  
Headlight cleaning system  
Removing the wiper blade  
The headlights are being cleaned after the windscreen has been sprayed for the  
first time and fifth time, the low beam or main beam are switched on and the  
5
Fold windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen.  
1
windscreen wiper lever was held in the position  
⇒ꢀfig. 51 for about 1 second.  
Press the locking button  
⇒ꢀfig. 52, in order to unlock the wiper blade and  
2
£
pull off in the direction of arrow  
.
Lights and Visibility 69  
Attaching the wiper blade  
Removing the wiper blade  
Push the wiper blade until it locks up to the stop.  
Check whether the wiper blade is correctly attached.  
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back onto the windscreen.  
Fold windscreen wiper arm out from the windscreen and position the wiper  
blade at right angles to the wiper arm ⇒ꢀfig. 53.  
Hold the window wiper arm at the top end with one hand.  
1
With the other hand unlock the locking button  
and remove the wiper blade  
The wiper arms move back into the rest position - after switching on the ignition  
and after changing the position of the window wiper lever or when driving at a  
speed greater than 6°km/h.  
2
in the direction of arrow  
.
Attaching the wiper blade  
Push the wiper blade until it locks up to the stop.  
Windscreen wiper blades in proper condition are essential to obtain good visibility.  
Wiper blades should not be allowed to become dirtied by dust, insect remains and  
preserving wax.  
Check whether the wiper blade is correctly attached.  
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back onto the windscreen.  
Juddering or smearing of the wiper blades could then be due to wax residues left  
on the windscreen by vehicle washing in automatic vehicle wash systems. It is  
therefore important to degrease the lips of the winscreen wiper blades after ev-  
ery pass through an automatic vehicle wash system.  
The same remarks apply here as for ⇒ꢀpage 68.  
Rear-view mirror  
WARNING  
If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage  
to the windscreen.  
You should clean the wiper blades regularly with a windscreen cleaner in  
Manual dimming interior rear-view mirror  
Basic setting  
order to avoid any smears. Clean a wiper blade with a sponge or cloth if it is  
very dirty, for example from insect residues.  
Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror forward.  
Dimming mirror  
Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror back.  
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea-  
sons. These can be bought from an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner.  
Automatic dimming interior mirror  
Replacing the wiper blade for rear window (Combi)  
Fig. 54 Automatic dimming interior mir-  
ror  
£
Fig. 53 Wiper blade for the rear window  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
70 Lights and Visibility  
Switching on the automatic dimming  
Exterior mirror  
B
A
Press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 54, the warning light  
lights up.  
You can adjust the exterior mirrors electrically.  
Switching off the automatic dimming  
B
A
Press again the button  
- the warning light goes out  
.
If the automatic dimming is switched on, the mirror dims automatically depending  
on the light striking the mirror from the rear. The mirror has no lever on the bot-  
tom edge of the mirror. After the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror always  
moves back into the normal position.  
Do not attach external navigation devices on the windscreen or in the vicinity of  
the automatic dimming interior mirror ⇒ꢀ  
.
Fig. 55 Inner part of door: Rotary knob  
WARNING  
The display lighting of the external navigation device may cause malfunction  
of the automatic dimming interior mirror – risk of accident.  
Adjust the rear mirror before commencing to drive so that there is a clear view to  
the rear.  
The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an  
outside temperature of +20 °C.  
Note  
Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear  
window in the housing on the luggage compartment cover is not in use or the  
light striking the interior rear-view mirror is not affected by other objects.  
It is only possible to fold in both exterior mirrors when the ignition is switched on  
and at a speed of up to 15 km/h.  
Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair  
the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation.  
If you switch off the automatic dimming interior rear-view mirror, also the ex-  
terior mirror dimming is switched off.  
Heating of the external mirror  
Turn the rotary knob to position ⇒ꢀfig. 55.  
Adjusting left and right exterior mirrors simultaneously  
Turn the rotary knob to position . The movement of the mirror surface is iden-  
tical to the movement of the rotary knob.  
The adjustment of both mirrors simultaneously or each individual mirror is possi-  
ble in the Information display ⇒ꢀtable on page 20 in the menu point Mirror adjust.  
(Mirror adjust.).  
Adjusting the right-hand exterior mirror  
Turn the rotary knob to position . The movement of the mirror surface is iden-  
tical to the movement of the rotary knob.  
Switching off operating control  
Turn the rotary knob to position .  
£
Lights and Visibility 71  
Folding in both exterior mirrors  
Turn the rotary knob to position .  
Exterior mirror with entry lighting  
The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror.  
Fold in the exterior mirrors using the remote control key  
The light beam is aimed at the entry area of the front doors after the car is un-  
locked.  
3
If all the windows are closed, press the unlock button  
remote control for approx. 2 seconds.  
⇒ꢀfig. 25 on the radio  
The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the front door.  
The lighting goes out about 30 seconds after the doors are closed or if the igni-  
tion is switched on.  
Tilting surface of front passenger exterior mirror  
When the rotary knob is in position ⇒ꢀfig. 55 and the reverse gear is engaged, the  
surface of the mirror tilts down slightly. This provides an aid in seeing the kerb of  
the pavement when parking the car.  
If the doors remain open, the lighting goes out automatically after about 10 mi-  
nutes provided the ignition is not switched on.  
The mirror returns into its initial position, after the rotary knob is moved out of the  
position and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km/h.  
Automatic dimming exterior mirror  
Memory for exterior mirrors  
The exterior mirrors are dimmed together with the interior mirror. If the automatic  
dimming is switched on, the mirror dims automatically depending on the light  
striking the mirror from the rear.  
On vehicles fitted with a memory for the driver seat, the relevant setting of the  
exterior mirror is also stored automatically when the seat position is stored  
⇒ꢀpage 74.  
When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror  
always moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).  
WARNING  
Convex (curved outward) or a spherical exterior mirrors increase the vision  
Note  
field. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the mirror. These mir-  
rors are only of limited use, therefore, for estimating distances to the follow-  
ing vehicles.  
Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear  
window is not in use or the light striking the rear of the interior rear-view mirror is  
not affected by other objects.  
Use whenever possible the interior rear mirror, for estimating the distan-  
Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair  
the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation.  
If you switch off the automatic dimming interior rear-view mirror, also the ex-  
terior mirror dimming is switched off.  
ces to the following vehicles.  
Note  
Do not touch the surfaces of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is  
switched on.  
You can set the exterior mirrors by hand, if the power setting function fails at  
any time, by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.  
Contact your specialist garage if a fault exists with the power setting of the  
exterior mirrors.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
72 Seats and Stowage  
Seats and Stowage  
Front seats  
WARNING (Continued)  
Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get be-  
hind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You would then no  
longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or accelerate.  
Basic information  
The front seats have a wide range of different settings and can thus be matched  
to the physical characteristics of the driver and front passenger.  
Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat except objects  
(e.g. child safety seat) provided for this purpose - risk of accident!  
Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for:  
Adjusting the front seats  
safely and quickly reaching the controls,  
a relaxed, fatigue-free body position,  
achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag  
system.  
WARNING  
Never transport more occupants than the maximum seating in the vehicle.  
Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.  
Children must be fastened ⇒ꢀpage 166, Transporting children safely with a  
suitable restraint system.  
Fig. 56 Controls at seat  
The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match  
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be  
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your  
occupants.  
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction  
1
Pull the lever  
⇒ꢀfig. 56 up and push the seat into the desired position.  
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never  
1
Release the lever  
gage.  
and push the seat further until the lock is heard to en-  
place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the surfaces  
of the seats. This is particularly important for the front seat passenger. You  
will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the  
brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer  
fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!  
Adjusting height of seat  
2
Lift the seat if required by pulling or pumping lever  
upwards.  
2
Lower the seat if required by pushing or pumping lever  
downwards.  
It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of  
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Not maintaining this  
minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to proper-  
ly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints must always  
also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.  
Adjust the angle of the seat backrest  
Relieve any pressure on the seat backrest (do not lean on it) and turn the  
3
handwheel  
to adjust the angle of the backrest.  
Adjusting lumbar support  
4
Turn the lever  
until you have set the most comfortable curvature of the  
£
seat upholstery in the area of your spine.  
Seats and Stowage 73  
The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully  
pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs.  
Adjust the angle of the seat cushion  
B
2
Press the switch  
at the front in the direction of arrow  
or at the back in  
3
the direction of arrow  
.
The seat backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the  
upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms.  
Adjusting the seat backrest  
C
Press the switch  
in the direction of the desired setting.  
WARNING  
Adjusting lumbar support  
Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!  
A
A
A
A
Press the switch  
bar support.  
at the front in order to enlarge the curvature of the lum-  
rear in order to reduce the curvature of the lumbar sup-  
top in order to adjust the curvature of the lumbar support  
bottom in order to adjust the curvature of the lumbar sup-  
Take care when adjusting the seat! Adjusting the seat without care can  
lead to bruises or injuries.  
The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving other-  
Press the switch  
port.  
wise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag sys-  
tem - risk of injury!  
Press the switch  
higher.  
Press the switch  
port lower.  
Adjusting front seats electrically  
B
C
Switch  
switch  
is operated in order to move the seat up/down and forward/back, while  
is operated in order to move the backrest forward or back.  
Adjusting seats  
WARNING  
Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!  
Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a re-  
sult of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.  
In view of the fact that the seats can also be adjusted when the ignition is  
switched off (even when ignition key withdrawn), you should never leave chil-  
dren unattended in the car.  
The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving other-  
wise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag sys-  
tem - risk of injury!  
Fig. 57 Side view: Controls for adjusting the seat/seat setting switch  
Adopt the correct seated position before setting ⇒ꢀpage 72.  
Note  
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction  
If the movement of the seat is inadvertently interrupted during an adjustment,  
once again press the switch in the appropriate direction and continue with the ad-  
justment of the seat to the end.  
B
Press the switch  
⇒ꢀfig. 57 forwards or backwards in the direction of arrow  
1
.
Set the height of the seat cushion  
B
Press the switch  
upwards or downwards.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
74 Seats and Stowage  
Storing setting  
Emergency Off  
You can interrupt the setting operation at any time, if you operate any button of  
the driver seat.  
Note  
For safety reasons, it is not possible to store this position if the inclination an-  
gle of the seat backrest is more than 102° in relation to the seat cushion.  
When storing settings with the memory buttons, we recommend that you be-  
gin with the front button and assign a memory button to each additional driver.  
Each new setting stored with the same button erases the previous setting.  
Fig. 58 Driver seat: Memory buttons  
and SET button  
Each time you store the seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward  
you also have to re-store the individual setting of the exterior mirror on the pas-  
senger side for reversing.  
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward  
Switch on the ignition.  
Adjust the seat ⇒ꢀpage 73.  
Adjust both exterior mirrors ⇒ꢀpage 70.  
A
Assigning the remote control key to the memory buttons  
Assigning the remote control key to the memory buttons  
After storing the settings of the seat and exterior mirrors, you have 10 seconds in  
order to assign the remote control to the appropriate memory button.  
Press button SET  
⇒ꢀfig. 58.  
B
Press one of the memory buttons  
within 10 seconds after pressing the but-  
Withdraw the ignition key.  
ton SET - an acknowledgement signal confirms that the seat setting is stored..  
Press the unlock button ⇒ꢀpage 44, after the successful assignment an audible  
signal will sound. The setting is stored with the memory button which you  
have selected.  
Storing exterior mirror setting for reversing  
Switch on the ignition.  
Turn the exterior mirror control to position ⇒ꢀpage 70.  
Engage reverse gear.  
Assigning the remote control key to the memory buttons on the KESSY system  
On vehicles which are equipped with the KESSY system, the following procedure  
for assigning the remote control key to the memory buttons exists for electrically  
adjustable front seats and mirrors.  
Move the right exterior mirror into the desired position ⇒ꢀpage 70.  
Take the vehicle out of gear. The set position of the exterior mirror is stored.  
Switch the ignition off within 10 seconds after storing the setting.  
Open the driver door.  
Station keys  
Memory for the seat offers the possibility to store the individual driver seat and  
Press the unlock button on the remote control key within 10 seconds.  
external mirror position. An individual position can be allocated to each of the  
B
three memory buttons  
⇒ꢀfig. 58, that is three in total. After pressing the corre-  
If you wish to be able to retrieve the settings which are stored in the memory by  
also using the remote control, you have to assign the remote control to a memory  
button in each case.  
B
sponding memory button , the seat and the exterior mirror are automatically  
moved into the positions which have been allocated to this button ⇒ꢀpage 75.  
£
Seats and Stowage 75  
If you wish, you can obtain an additional remote control key from an authorised  
ŠKODA Service partner and then assign the remote control key to another memo-  
ry button.  
The mirror returns into its initial position, after the rotary knob is moved out of the  
position and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km/h.  
Emergency Off  
Note  
You can interrupt the setting operation at any time, if you operate any button of  
the driver seat.  
If the remote control had previously been assigned to another memory button,  
this setting is then erased by the new assignment.  
If you assign the remote control to a memory button which has already been  
assigned to a remote control, the old assignment is also replaced by a new assign-  
ment in this case.  
Head restraints  
The assignment of the radio remote control to a memory button is retained,  
however, after reassigning the seats and exterior mirrors.  
After the successful assignment, the turn signal lights flash and an audible  
signal will sound as a confirmation. The setting is stored with the memory button  
which you have selected.  
Retrieving settings of the seat and mirrors  
You can retrieve the stored settings either with the memory but-  
tons or with the remote control.  
Fig. 59 Head restraint: Adjusting/pulling out  
Retrieving settings with memory buttons  
Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the same  
level as the upper part of your head.  
In order to retrieve the stored setting, you have two possibilities:  
B
By pressing briefly: briefly press the desired memory button  
⇒ꢀfig. 58. The  
Adjusting the height of a head restraint  
seat and exterior mirror are moved automatically into the stored positions (this  
applies only if the ignition is switched on and the speed is less than 5 km/h).  
Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it in upward di-  
rection as desired ⇒ꢀfig. 59 - left.  
B
Memory keying: Press and hold the desired memory button  
pressed long  
Move the head restraint downwards if required by pressing and holding the  
safety button with one hand ⇒ꢀfig. 59 - right and by pressing with the other  
hand the head restraint downwards.  
enough until the seat and the exterior mirror are moved into the stored posi-  
tions.  
Retrieving settings with remote control  
Removing and installing a head restraint  
If the driver door is closed and the ignition is switched off, briefly press the un-  
Pull the head restraint up out of the seat backrest as far as the stop (on the  
rear head restraints fold forward the seat backrest).  
lock button of the remote control ⇒ꢀpage 44 and then open the driver door.  
The seat and exterior mirrors now move automatically into the stored posi-  
tions.  
Press the locking button in the direction of arrow ⇒ꢀfig. 59 - right and pull the  
head restraint out.  
Retrieving setting of exterior mirror for reversing  
To re-insert the head restraint, push it down into the seat backrest far enough  
until you hear the locking button engage.  
£
Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror setting into the position   
⇒ꢀpage 70 before engaging the reverse gear.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
76 Seats and Stowage  
The position of the front and rear outer head restraints is adjustable in height.  
The middle rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions.  
To re-insert the head restraint, push it down into the seat backrest far enough  
until you hear the locking button engage.  
The head restraints must be adjusted to match the size of the seat occupant. Cor-  
rectly adjusted head restraints together with the seat belts offer effective protec-  
tion for the occupants ⇒ꢀpage 150, Correct seated position.  
WARNING  
The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective  
protection for the occupants in the event of an accident.  
Do not drive under any circumstance with removed head restraints - risk of  
injury!  
WARNING  
The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective  
protection for the occupants in the event of an accident.  
Do not drive under any circumstance with removed head restraints - risk of  
injury!  
If the rear seats are occupied, the rear head restraint must not be in the  
lower position.  
If the rear seats are occupied, the rear head restraint must not be in the  
lower position.  
Rear seats  
Folding the seat backrest forwards  
Middle rear head restraint  
Fig. 60 Rear seats: middle head re-  
straint  
Fig. 61 Unlock the seat backrest/lock the seat backrest  
IIn certain countries national legal provisions also require the equipment of the  
rear seat with fixing eyes for child seat using the “Top Tether” system  
⇒ꢀpage 172, Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system. For vehicles,  
which are equipped with such fixing eyes, a deviating sequence for removing the  
middle head restraint must be observed.  
The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backrests  
forward or also by folding the seat cushions forward on vehicles of the type Com-  
bi.  
£
Removing and installing the rear middle head restraint  
Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.  
A
Press the locking button in the direction of arrow , press simultaneously the  
B
locking button into the opening  
using a flat screwdriver with a width of  
maximum 5 mm and pull out the head restraint.  
Seats and Stowage 77  
Folding the seat backrests forward  
Folding the rear seats forwards (estate car)  
Before folding the seat backrests forwards, you must adapt the position of the  
front seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backr-  
1)  
ests.  
A
Unlock the seat backrest by pressing the unlocking handle  
it completely forwards.  
⇒ꢀfig. 61 and fold  
Put the seat backrests into the original position  
Install the head restraint in the slightly lifted seat backrest.  
C
Place the rear lateral seat belt  
panel.  
⇒ꢀfig. 61 behind the edge of the side trim  
Fig. 62 Folding the seat cushion for-  
wards  
Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing  
knob clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest.  
To enlarge the luggage compartment, the rear seats can be folded forwards  
⇒ꢀpage 76, if necessary fold the seat cushions forwards.  
B
Make sure that the red pin  
is hidden.  
Folding the seat cushion forwards  
1
WARNING  
Pull up the seat cushion in direction of arrow  
⇒ꢀfig. 62 and fold forwards in  
2
direction of arrow  
.
The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding  
back the seat backrests - they must be ready to use.  
The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no ob-  
jects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment if  
there is sudden braking - risk of injury!  
Note  
In order to achieve a loading space as horizontal as possible, the rear head re-  
straints can be removed before folding the seat backrests forwards. Store the re-  
moved head restraints in such a way that they cannot be damaged or soiled.  
Pay attention that the seat backrests are correctly interlocked. It is only  
then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its  
function.  
Before folding the seat backrest back into the secure position, place the  
rear lateral seat belt behind the edge of the side trim panel. Take suitable  
measures to prevent that the seat belt is jammed between the seat backrest  
and the side trim panel and is thus damaged.  
1)  
If the front seats are too far back, we recommend that you have the rear head restraints removed  
before the seat backrests are folded forward, in order to achieve a loading space as horizontal as  
possible. Store the removed head restraints in such a way that they cannot be damaged or soiled.  
Please refer to the guidelines ⇒ꢀpage 79.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
78 Seats and Stowage  
Rear seat armrest  
With repeated pressing of the switch, the intensity of the heating is down-  
regulated up to the switch-off. The intensity of the heating is indicated by the  
number of illuminated warning lights in the switch.  
WARNING  
If, as an occupant, you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity,  
e.g. through medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes),  
we recommend not to use the seat heating. This can lead to burns on the  
back, the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal. If the seat heating  
is used, we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving  
long distances, so that in specific cases as mentioned above the body can re-  
cuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor, who can  
evaluate your specific condition.  
Fig. 63 Rear seats: Armrest  
You can fold down the armrest to enhance occupant comfort ⇒ꢀfig. 63.  
CAUTION  
Seat heaters  
You should not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific  
points in order to avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters.  
Do not use the seat heating if the seats are not occupied by persons or if ob-  
jects are fastened or stored on them, for example a child seat, a bag etc. A fault of  
the heating elements in the seat heating can occur.  
Do not clean the seats moist ⇒ꢀpage 193.  
Note  
The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is running. This  
has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity.  
If the on-board voltage drops, the seat heating is switched off automatically,  
in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control ⇒ꢀpage 208,  
Fig. 64 Dash panel: Regulator for heating the front seats/rear seats  
Automatic consumer shut-off.  
If you set the heating of the rear seats to the highest intensity - 3rd stage, it is  
You can electrically heat the seat backrests and the surfaces of the front seats  
and the two outer rear seats.  
automatically switched over to the 2nd stage after 10 minutes (two warning lights  
light up in the switch).  
You can switch on and regulate the seat heating of the driver or front passen-  
ger seat by pressing the surface of the regulator at the point at which the  
symbol is located ⇒ꢀfig. 64 - left.  
You can switch on and adjust the heaters of the left or right rear seats by  
pressing the regulator ⇒ꢀfig. 64 - right.  
With one press, you can switch the heating to highest intensity - 3rd stage,  
which is indicated by the lighting up of the three warning lights in the switch.  
Seats and Stowage 79  
Ventilated front seats  
Note  
The ventilation should only be switched on when the engine is running. This  
has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity.  
We do not recommend you use the front seat ventilation and heating at the  
same time. Using the ventilation to cool the seat surface considerably reduces the  
heating capacity, at the same time affecting the ability of the control unit to de-  
tect the right seat surface temperature.  
luggage compartment  
Fig. 65 Rocker switch: seat ventilation  
Loading the luggage compartment  
You can remove heat and condensation from the seat cushions and seat backr-  
ests on the front seats.  
Please observe the following in the interest of having good handling characteris-  
tics of your vehicle:  
The ventilation is operated using the rocker switch ⇒ꢀfig. 65 in the front part of  
the seat cushion, in front of the seat control elements.  
Distribute the items of luggage as evenly as possible.  
Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.  
Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or the fixing net ⇒ꢀpage 80.  
Thew ventilation of the front seat is switch on by toggling the rocker switch  
1
2
into position  
- lower intensity, or position  
- higher intensity.  
To switch off the ventilation shift the rocker switch into the horizontal posi-  
tion.  
In the event of an accident, there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced  
by small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries. The magnitude of  
the kinetic energy depends on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on  
the weight of the object. The speed at which the vehicle is travelling is in this case  
the more significant factor.  
WARNING  
If, as an occupant, you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity,  
e.g. through medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes),  
we recommend you consult your physician before using the ventilated front  
seat.  
Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an unsecured  
object with a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corresponds to 20 times  
its own weight. This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg. You can  
imagine the injuries that can occur, if this “bullet” is flying through the interior  
compartment and hits an occupant.  
£
CAUTION  
You should not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific  
points in order to avoid damaging the electronic seat elements or the fan.  
The fan is located underneath the front seat cushion. Do not put any objects in  
this area- may cause damage to the fan.  
Do not clean the seats moist ⇒ꢀpage 193.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
80 Seats and Stowage  
WARNING  
Fastening elements  
Store the objects in the luggage compartment and attach them to the  
lashing eyes.  
Loose objects in the passenger compartment can be thrown forward dur-  
ing a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants  
or other oncoming traffic. This risk is still increased, if the objects which are  
flying around are hit by a deployed airbag. In this case, the objects which are  
thrown back can injure the occupants - hazard.  
Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle may be affected  
when transporting heavy objects as a result of the displacement of the centre  
of gravity. The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly.  
Fig. 66 Luggage compartment: Lashing eyes and fastening elements (Superb/Combi)  
The items carried in the luggage compartment should be stored in such a  
way that no objects are able to slip forward if there are any sudden driving or  
braking manoeuvres undertaken - risk of injury!  
Eyes and fastening elements are located on the sides of the luggage compart-  
ment for securing the items of luggage ⇒ꢀfig. 66.  
You can also attach a floor fixing net to these lashing eyes for holding small ob-  
jects.  
Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise ex-  
haust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!  
On no account exceed the permissible axle loads and the permissible gross  
weight of the vehicle - risk of accident!  
WARNING  
Never transport occupants in the luggage compartment!  
The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way that it can-  
not move during the journey and when braking.  
If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with un-  
CAUTION  
Make sure that transported objects with sharp edges do not damage the follow-  
ing:  
suitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur in the event of braking  
manoeuvres or accidents. In order to prevent the items of luggage being  
thrown forward, always use suitable lashing straps which are firmly attached  
to the lashing eyes.  
heating elements in the rear window,  
elements of the aerial integrated in the rear window (Superb),  
elements of the aerial integrated in the rear side windows (Combi).  
Note  
Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load ⇒ꢀpage 210.  
Vehicles of category N1  
On vehicles of the category N1, which are not fitted with a protective grille, a lash-  
ing set which complies with the standard EN 12195 (1 - 4) must be used for fasten-  
ing the load.  
Seats and Stowage 81  
Fixing nets - Net programme  
Note  
A
The hooks  
⇒ꢀfig. 68, located on both sides of the luggage compartment, are  
only designed for fixing the fixing net.  
Folding hooks  
Fig. 67 Fixing net: Vertical pocket, floor fixing net and horizontal pocket  
Fig. 69 Luggage compartment: folding hook/luggage compartment: folding hook (Combi)  
Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., are provided  
on both sides of the luggage compartment ⇒ꢀfig. 69.  
WARNING  
Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ꢀpage 79.  
Fig. 68 Fixing nets (Combi)  
CAUTION  
Fixing examples for fixing net as horizontal pocket on the left ⇒ꢀfig. 67 and  
⇒ꢀfig. 68, floor fixing net on the right ⇒ꢀfig. 67 and vertical pocket on the right  
⇒ꢀfig. 67 and ⇒ꢀfig. 68.  
An item of luggage weighing up to 7.5 kg can be attached to the hook.  
The fixing nets are stored in the right side storage compartment of the luggage  
compartment.  
WARNING  
The permissible load of the side nets is 1.5 kg. Heavy objects are not secured  
sufficiently - risk of injury and net damage!  
CAUTION  
Do not place any objects with sharp edges in the nets - risk of net damage.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
82 Seats and Stowage  
Fixing floor covering of the luggage compartment  
Luggage compartment cover  
You can use the luggage compartment cover behind the head re-  
straints for storing light and soft items.  
Fig. 70 Luggage compartment: Fixing of the floor covering Superb/Combi  
Fig. 72 Removing the luggage compart-  
ment cover  
There is a loop (Superb) or there are hooks (Combi) located on the floor covering  
of the luggage compartment. You can fix the raised floor cover with a hook to the  
luggage compartment cover (Superb) ⇒ꢀfig. 70 - left, as if one needs to reach the  
spare wheel or to the frame of the boot lid (Combi) ⇒ꢀfig. 70 - right.  
The luggage compartment cover can be removed as required if one must trans-  
port bulky goods.  
1
Unhook the support straps  
⇒ꢀfig. 72.  
Luggage net  
Place the cover in the horizontal position.  
2
Pull the cover out of the holder  
horizontally to the rear.  
Install again by pushing the luggage compartment cover forwards into the  
2
1
holder  
and hanging the support straps  
on the boot lid.  
You can stow the removed luggage compartment cover behind the rear seat back-  
rest.  
WARNING  
Fig. 71 Luggage compartment: Luggage  
net  
No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover, the vehicle  
occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle col-  
lides with something.  
The luggage net is designed for the tranportation of lighter objects.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not dam-  
aged as a result of objects placed in this area.  
In the storage net you must only stow objects (up to a total weight of 1.5  
kg). Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury!  
No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the luggage net, because  
they can damage the luggage net.  
Note  
Opening the tailgate also lifts up the luggage compartment cover.  
Seats and Stowage 83  
The cover rolls up fully by pressing the cover in the handle area in direction of  
Foldable luggage compartment cover (Combi)  
3
arrow  
.
When the boot lid is opened quickly, the automatic rolling up of the foldable lug-  
gage compartment cover is blocked for a delay time of approx. 2 seconds.  
The function of the automatic rolling up of the foldable luggage compartment  
cover can be activated/deactivated in the information display in the menu:  
Settings  
Autom. blind  
WARNING  
Fig. 73 Luggage compartment: foldable luggage compartment cover/removing foldable lug-  
gage compartment cover  
No objects should be placed on the foldable luggage compartment cover.  
Pulling out  
Removing the variable loading floor in the luggage compartment  
Pull the foldable luggage compartment cover as far as the stop into the se-  
2
cured position  
⇒ꢀfig. 73.  
Folding  
Press the cover in the handle area in direction of arrow  
3
⇒ꢀfig. 73, the cover  
1
rolls up automatically into position . The cover is fully rolled up by pressing  
once again.  
Removing  
The fully folded luggage compartment cover can be removed to transport bul-  
4
ky goods by pressing on the side of the cross rod in direction of arrow  
5
⇒ꢀfig. 73 and taking it out by moving it in direction of arrow  
.
Fig. 74 Luggage compartment: Remove variable loading floor/remove carrier rails  
The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier. You  
can remove the variable loading floor if necessary.  
WARNING  
No objects should be placed on the foldable luggage compartment cover.  
A
Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the safety eyes  
left by around 90°.  
⇒ꢀfig. 74 to the  
Automatic luggage compartment cover (Combi)  
Fold together the loading floor and take it out by moving in direction of arrow.  
B
C
Unlock the carrier rails  
right by approx. 90°.  
by turning the arbor-mounted fixing eyes  
to the  
The automatic rolling up of the foldable luggage compartment cov-  
er enables an easier entry into the luggage compartment.  
£
Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door. The foldable luggage compart-  
1
ment cover rolls up automatically in the position  
to ⇒ꢀfig. 73.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
84 Seats and Stowage  
WARNING  
Note  
The space below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing objects, for  
example the fixing set, the removed foldable luggage compartment cover, the bi-  
cycle holder etc.  
Pay attention when installing the variable loading floor that the carrier rails  
and the variable loading floor are correctly attached. If this is not the case,  
there is a risk of injury for the occupants.  
Partially pulling out the variable loading floor  
CAUTION  
The maximum load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.  
Dividing the luggage compartment with variable loading floor  
Fig. 76 Luggage compartment: partially pulling out the variable loading floor  
Fig. 75 Luggage compartment: Dividing  
the luggage compartment with variable  
loading floor  
The variable loading floor can be partially pulled out over the rear bumper. The  
variable loading floor which is pulled out in such a way is solely used as a seat, for  
example for changing shoes. When pulling out the variable loading floor, the front  
edge (close to the rear seats) is lifted at the same time. Thus, small objects can no  
longer fall into the space between the luggage compartment floor and the varia-  
ble loading floor.  
The luggage compartment can be divided with the variable loading floor.  
Lift up the part with the holder and secure it by sliding it into the grooves  
⇒ꢀfig. 75.  
Grasp the rear part of the variable floor at the handle, raise it slightly in direc-  
1
2
tion of arrow  
⇒ꢀfig. 76 and pull it over the bumper in direction of arrow  
C
until it engages in the opening  
⇒ꢀfig. 76.  
Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment  
(Combi)  
Grasp the part of the floor at the handle, raise it slightly in direction of arrow  
1
and push it forwards up to the stop in order to push in the variable loading  
floor.  
Introduction  
CAUTION  
The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier.  
Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged.  
CAUTION  
The maximum load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.  
Seats and Stowage 85  
Dividing the luggage compartment with variable loading floor  
Fig. 79 Luggage compartment: remove variable loading floor  
Fig. 77 Divide the luggage compartment  
You can remove and reinstall the variable loading floor, if necessary.  
The luggage compartment can be divided with the variable loading floor.  
remove variable loading floor  
1
Grasp the rear part of the floor at the handle, raise it in direction of arrow  
A
Grasp the rear part of the floor at the handle, raise it slightly in direction of ar-  
⇒ꢀfig. 76 and insert the rear edge in one of the openings  
⇒ꢀfig. 77.  
1
2
row  
at ⇒ꢀfig. 78 and pull it over the bumper in direction of arrow  
until it  
C
engages in the opening  
⇒ꢀfig. 79.  
A
The variable loading floor is secured in the openings  
against movement.  
3
You can fold together the loading floor by moving it in direction of arrow  
⇒ꢀfig. 78.  
The variable loading floor can be pulled out some more before dividing the lug-  
gage compartment with the variable loading floor ⇒ꢀpage 84. This enlarges the  
space between the rear seats and the separation.  
A
Press the safety buttons  
⇒ꢀfig. 79 and remove the floor.  
Installing the variable loading floor  
CAUTION  
Fold together the floor and place it on the carrier rail.  
Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged.  
B
Push the floor forwards until it engages in the openings  
rier rails.  
⇒ꢀfig. 79 in the car-  
Removing and installing the variable loading floor (Combi)  
C
Carefully press on the points of the openings  
on the floor until it is heard to  
A
lock in place, if necessary press the safety buttons  
.
WARNING  
Pay attention when installing the variable loading floor that it is correctly at-  
tached. If this is not the case, there is a risk of injury for the occupants.  
Fig. 78 Luggage compartment: Fold up variable loading floor  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
86 Seats and Stowage  
Fixing set (Combi)  
Note  
Do not use the fixing set for securing objects which might damage the fixing  
set.  
5
The tensioning strap can also be fully reeled up by pressing the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 80.  
Moveable lashing eyes (Combi)  
Fig. 80 Telescopic pole and tensioning strap  
The fixing set can be used for dividing the luggage compartment or for securing  
the objects which are being transported.  
Telescopic pole  
Insert the holder for the telescopic pole on the left and right into the openings  
of the carrier rails.  
Fig. 81 Moveable lashing eyes  
1
Press the top part of the holder in direction of arrow  
⇒ꢀfig. 80 and push it at  
Four moveable lashing eyes, which can be used for example for attaching the fix-  
ing net, are located in the luggage compartment.  
2
the same time in the desired position, arrow  
.
Ensure that the holder is correctly interlocked.  
1
Press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 81 and push the lashing eye in the desired position,  
2
arrow  
.
Tensioning strap  
3
Insert the holder of the tensioning strap into the opening of the left or right  
carrier rail.  
Fold up the clamp  
⇒ꢀfig. 81 and fix, for example, the fixing net.  
3
Press the holder in direction of arrow  
⇒ꢀfig. 80 and push it at the same time  
4
in the desired position, arrow  
.
Ensure that the holder is correctly interlocked.  
Place the object which should be fastened behind the tensioning strap.  
5
Press the button  
on the top side of the holder and tighten the strap.  
WARNING  
The objects in the luggage compartment must be firmly secured with the fix-  
ing set so that they cannot move freely and uncontrollably in order to prevent  
damage to objects or injuries to the occupants.  
Seats and Stowage 87  
Use the luggage net partition behind the front seats  
Net partition (Estate)  
Use the luggage net partition behind the rear seats  
Fig. 83 Pull out the luggage net parti-  
tion  
Fig. 82 Pull out the luggage net parti-  
tion  
Pulling out  
Fold the rear seats forwards ⇒ꢀpage 76  
Pulling out  
A
B
Pull the net partiton at the bracket  
⇒ꢀfig. 83 out of the housing  
A
B
Pull the net partition at the bracket  
⇒ꢀfig. 82 out of the housing  
in direc-  
C
Insert the cross rod into the mount  
rod forward.  
first on the one side and push the cross  
C
tion of the holders  
Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts  
In the same way, fix the cross rod to the other side of the vehicle, mount  
.
C
and push the cross rod forward.  
C
In the same way, fix the cross rod to the other side of the vehicle, mount  
.
C
.
Folding  
Folding  
Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on the other side and  
C
take the cross rod out of the mounts  
.
Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on the other side and  
C
take the cross rod out of the mount  
⇒ꢀfig. 82.  
Hold the cross rod in such a way that the luggage net partition can roll up  
B
slowly and without damage into the housing  
.
Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can roll up into the  
B
housing  
slowly and without damage.  
Fold the rear seats back into its original position.  
If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment, you can remove the foldable  
luggage compartment cover ⇒ꢀfig. 73.  
WARNING  
The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position after folding  
WARNING  
back the seat cushions and the seat backrests - they must be ready to use.  
C
The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no ob-  
jects in the luggage compartment can slide forwards if there is sudden brak-  
ing - risk of injury!  
First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts  
the front position!  
in  
£
Pay attention that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked. It is only  
then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its  
function.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
88 Seats and Stowage  
The roof rack  
Description  
CAUTION  
WARNING (Continued)  
Pay attention that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked. It is only  
then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its  
function.  
C
First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts  
in the front position!  
Only use roof racks approved by ŠKODA.  
If you use other roof rack systems or if the roof bars are not properly fitted,  
then any damage which may result to your car is not covered by the warranty  
agreements. It is therefore essential to pay attention to the fitting instructions  
supplied with the roof luggage rack system.  
Removing and installing the luggage net partition housing  
On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof or a panoramic sliding roof,  
ensure that the opened sliding/tilting roof or the panoramic sliding roof does not  
strike any items of luggage transported on the roof.  
Ensure that the opened boot lid does not collide with the roof load.  
For the sake of the environment  
The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption.  
Fig. 84 Rear seats: Luggage net parti-  
tion housing  
Attachment points  
Removing  
Fold the rear seats forwards ⇒ꢀpage 76  
Open the right rear door.  
A
Push the luggage net partition housing  
⇒ꢀfig. 84 in the direction of arrow  
1
2
and take it out of the mount of the rear seats in the direction of arrow  
.
Install  
Position the net partition housing into the mounts of the rear seat backrests.  
Fig. 85 Attachment points for base roof  
carrier  
1
Push the luggage net partition housing in the opposite direction of arrow  
as far as the stop.  
Perform the assembly and the disassembly according to the attached instructions.  
Fold the rear seats back into its original position.  
Note  
WARNING  
If you have any questions, please contact a specialist garage.  
Pay attention that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked. It is only  
then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its  
function.  
The figure is not valid for an estate car.  
Seats and Stowage 89  
On vehicles which are fitted with a cover for cup holders, you can cover the cup  
Roof load  
A
holder by pulling at the handle  
.
Distribute the weight evenly over the roof luggage rack system. The maximum  
permissible roof load (including roof rack system) of 100 kg and the maximum per-  
missible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded.  
WARNING  
Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,  
they may spill - risk of scalding!  
Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.  
You cannot make full use of the permissible roof load if you use a roof luggage  
rack system with a lower load carrying capacity. The load transported on the roof  
luggage rack system must not exceed the weight limit which is stated in the fit-  
ting instructions.  
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Do not open the beverages in the cup holder while driving. There is a risk of spill-  
ing e.g. when braking and therefore the electrical components or the seat uphols-  
tery can be damaged.  
The items which you transport on the roof bar system must be reliably at-  
tached - risk of accident!  
You must on no account exceed the permissible roof load, the permissible  
axle loads and the permissible gross weight of your vehicle - risk of accident!  
Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle change when you  
Cup holder in the armrest of the rear seats  
transport heavy or bulky items on the roof bar system as a result of the dis-  
placement of the centre of gravity and the increased wind attack area - risk of  
accident! You must absolutely adapt your style of driving and the speed of the  
vehicle to the specific circumstances.  
Cup holder  
Cup holder in front centre console  
Fig. 87 Armrest of rear seats: Cup holder/insert cup holder  
You can place two cups into the cup holder.  
If you press on the face end of the armrest in the direction of arrow ⇒ꢀfig. 87 -  
left, the cup holder comes out.  
In order to slide the cup holder in again, press the middle part of the cup hold-  
£
er ⇒ꢀfig. 87 - right and slide it into the armrest.  
Fig. 86 Front centre console: Cup holder  
You can place two cups or beverage cans into the recesses ⇒ꢀfig. 86.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
90 Seats and Stowage  
WARNING  
Ashtray  
Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,  
they may spill - risk of scalding!  
Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.  
Front ashtray  
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.  
CAUTION  
Do not open the beverages in the cup holder while driving. They may spill  
when braking and while doing so damage the vehicle.  
Before raising the armrest, first of all slide in the cup holder.  
Note holder  
Fig. 89 Centre console: Front ashtray  
Removing ashtray insert  
Open the ashtray ⇒ꢀfig. 95.  
A
Grasp the ashtray insert at the point  
arrow.  
⇒ꢀfig. 89 and take it out in direction of  
Insert ashtray insert  
Insert the ashtray vertically downwards.  
Fig. 88 Windscreen: Note holder  
WARNING  
The parking ticket holder is designed e.g. for attaching a car park ticket in parking  
areas.  
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!  
The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to  
restrict the driver's vision.  
Rear ashtray  
Fig. 90 Centre console: Rear ashtray  
£
Seats and Stowage 91  
Removing ashtray insert  
WARNING  
Open the ashtray ⇒ꢀfig. 102.  
Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Not paying proper attention or  
incorrect use the cigarette lighter in an uncontrolled manner may result in  
burns.  
Grasp the insert at the points marked with the arrows ⇒ꢀfig. 90 and take it out.  
Insert ashtray insert  
The cigarette lighter and the power socket also operates when the ignition  
is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn. You should therefore never  
leave children unattended in the vehicle.  
Insert the ashtray insert into the mount and press it in.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!  
Always use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power socket.  
Note  
Cigarette lighter, power sockets  
Connecting electrical components when the engine is not running will drain  
the battery of the vehicle - risk of battery draining!  
Cigarette lighter  
Further information ⇒ꢀpage 215, Accessories, changes and replacement of  
parts.  
You can also use the socket on the cigarette lighter for other elec-  
trical appliances.  
Power socket in the luggage compartment  
Using the cigarette lighter  
A
B
Press the button of the lighter  
⇒ꢀfig. 90 or  
⇒ꢀfig. 89.  
Wait until the button jumps forward.  
Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use it.  
Insert the cigarette lighter again into the socket.  
Using the socket  
Remove the cigarette lighter or the cover of the power socket.  
Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.  
Fig. 91 Luggage compartment: Power socket/luggage compartment: Power socket (Combi)  
The 12 volt power socket can also be used to supply power to additional electrical  
accessories with a power uptake up to 120 watts.  
Open the cover of the power socket ⇒ꢀfig. 91.  
Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.  
You can only use the power socket for the connection of approved electrical ac-  
cessories with a power uptake up to 120 watts. The vehicle battery will be dis-  
charged in the process if the engine is stationary.  
£
The same remarks apply here as for ⇒ꢀpage 91, Cigarette lighter, power sockets.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
92 Seats and Stowage  
Further information ⇒ꢀpage 215, Accessories, changes and replacement of parts.  
Storage compartment on the front passenger side  
Storage compartments  
Overview  
You will find the following storage facilities in your vehicle:  
Storage compartment on the front passenger side  
Storage compartment on the driver's side  
Stowage compartment in front centre console  
Storage net on the front centre console  
Stowage compartment for spectacles  
Storage compartment in the front doors  
Stowage compartment below front passenger seat  
Front seat armrest with stowage compartment  
Rear armrest with stowage compartment  
Stowage compartment in rear centre console  
Stowage compartment for an umbrella  
Seat backrest with opening for skis  
⇒ꢀpage 92  
⇒ꢀpage 93  
⇒ꢀpage 93  
⇒ꢀpage 93  
⇒ꢀpage 94  
⇒ꢀpage 94  
⇒ꢀpage 94  
⇒ꢀpage 95  
⇒ꢀpage 95  
⇒ꢀpage 95  
⇒ꢀpage 96  
⇒ꢀpage 96  
⇒ꢀpage 96  
⇒ꢀpage 97  
⇒ꢀpage 97  
⇒ꢀpage 97  
⇒ꢀpage 98  
Fig. 92 Dash panel: Storage compart-  
ment on the front passenger side  
Opening and closing the storage compartment on the front passenger side  
Press the button ⇒ꢀfig. 92 - the lid folds down.  
Raise the lid and press it until the catch is heard to engage.  
In the storage compartment are pin holders.  
WARNING  
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety rea-  
sons.  
Removeable through-loading bag  
Cooling of storage compartment on front passenger side  
Clothes hooks  
Side compartments in the luggage compartment  
Lockable side compartment (Combi)  
Non-lockable side compartment (Combi)  
WARNING  
Please do not place anything on top of the dash panel. Such objects might  
slide or fall down when driving (when accelerating or cornering) and may dis-  
tract you from concentrating on the traffic situation - risk of accident!  
Fig. 93 Storage compartment: Using  
cooling system  
Ensure that when driving no objects from the centre console of from other  
storage possibilities may get into the footwell of the driver. You would then  
no longer be able to apply the brakes, operate the clutch or accelerator - risk  
of accident!  
Open the air supply by pulling on the lever in direction of arrow ⇒ꢀfig. 93.  
£
The air supply closes by pressing the lever.  
Seats and Stowage 93  
Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows  
cooled air to flow into the storage compartment.  
Stowage compartment in front centre console  
Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or interi-  
or air to flow into the storage compartment.  
We recommend that you close the air supply if it is operating in the heating mode  
or if you are not using the cooling system for the storage compartment.  
Storage compartment on the driver's side  
Fig. 95 Front centre console: Storage  
compartment  
A
Press on the bottom part of the storage compartment in the area  
in the direction of the arrow, the lid opens.  
⇒ꢀfig. 95  
WARNING  
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also  
not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!  
Fig. 94 Dash panel: Storage compart-  
ment on the driver's side  
The storage compartment is opened by lifting the handle and folding open in  
the direction of arrow ⇒ꢀfig. 94.  
Storage net on the front centre console  
WARNING  
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety rea-  
sons.  
Fig. 96 Front centre console: Storage  
net  
The storage net in the front center console ⇒ꢀfig. 96 is designed for the transport  
£
of smaller objects.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
94 Seats and Stowage  
WARNING  
Storage compartment in the front doors  
In the storage net you must only stow objects (up to a total weight of 0.5  
kg). Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury!  
No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the luggage net, because  
they can damage the luggage net.  
Stowage compartment for spectacles  
Fig. 98 Storage compartment in the  
front doors  
WARNING  
Use the storage compartments in the door panels ⇒ꢀfig. 98 only for small  
items which do not project out of the compartment in order to avoid any inter-  
ference with the proper operation of the side airbags.  
Fig. 97 Detail of the headliner: Stowage  
compartment for spectacles  
Stowage compartment below front passenger seat  
A
Press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 97, the storage compartment folds down.  
CAUTION  
On vehicles which are fitted with an anti-theft alarm system, the opened stor-  
age compartment reduces the effectiveness of the sensors for the interior moni-  
tor.  
The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the spec-  
tacles and otherwise must be kept closed.  
Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the stowage compartment - they may  
Fig. 99 Front passenger seat: Storage  
compartment  
be damaged.  
To open the lid, pull the handle ⇒ꢀfig. 99.  
Hold the handle to close the flap until the flap is closed.  
CAUTION  
The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1.5 kg. in  
weight.  
Seats and Stowage 95  
Front seat armrest with storage compartment  
Rear seat armrest with storage compartment  
Fig. 100 Armrest: Storage compartment  
Fig. 101 Armrest of rear seats:  
The armrest is adjustable for height and length.  
You can fold down the armrest to enhance occupant comfort.  
The armrest includes a stowage compartment. You open the compartment by  
pressing the button on the front side and raising the cover ⇒ꢀfig. 101.  
Opening stowage compartment  
Open the lid of the armrest in the direction of arrow ⇒ꢀfig. 100.  
Closing stowage compartment  
Open the lid up to the stop, then you can fold it downwards.  
Stowage compartment in rear centre console  
Setting height  
First of all fold the lid to the bottom and lift it in the direction of arrow into one  
of the 4 fixed positions.  
Adjusting in forward/back direction  
Push the lid into the desired position.  
Note  
Fig. 102 Centre console at rear: Storage  
compartment  
Push the lid of the armrest up to stop to the rear before operating the handbrake.  
The storage compartment is equipped with a removeable insert.  
A
Open the storage compartment by pulling at the handle  
tion of arrow.  
⇒ꢀfig. 102 in direc-  
WARNING  
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also  
not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
96 Seats and Stowage  
Stowage compartment for umbrella  
WARNING  
The opening for the skis is solely used for transporting skis which are placed  
in a properly secured removeable through-loading bag ⇒ꢀpage 96.  
The storage compartment for an umbrella is located in the rear left door. You can  
purchase an umbrella from the range of the ŠKODA original accessories.  
Through-loading bag  
Seat backrest with opening for skis  
The removeable through-loading bag is solely used for transporting  
skis.  
Fig. 103 Rear seats: Handle of lid/luggage compartment: Unlock button  
Fig. 104 Securing the through-loading  
bag  
After folding open the armrest and the lid, an opening in the seat backrest be-  
comes visible through which you can push the removeable through-loading bag  
with skis. You can fold open the armrest and the lid from the passenger or lug-  
gage compartment.  
Loading  
Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.  
Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards  
⇒ꢀpage 96, Seat backrest with opening for skis.  
Place the empty through-loading bag in such a way that the end of the bag  
with the zip lies in the boot.  
Opening from passenger compartment  
Fold the rear armrest downwards ⇒ꢀfig. 63.  
Pull the handle up to the stop in upward direction and fold open the lid down-  
wards ⇒ꢀfig. 103 - left.  
Push the skis into the through-loading bag from the luggage compartment  
Opening from luggage compartment  
⇒ꢀ  
.
A
Push the unlock button  
rest) to the front.  
⇒ꢀfig. 103 downwards and fold the lid (with arm-  
Securing  
A
Tighten the strap  
⇒ꢀfig. 104.  
on the free end around the skis in front of the bindings  
Closing  
Fold the lid and the armrest up to the stop in upward direction - the lid must  
click into place audibly.  
Fold the seat backrest a little forward.  
B
Guide the securing strap  
through the opening in the seat backrest around  
Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing. You can recog-  
the upper part of the seat backrest.  
A
nize this on the fact that the red field above the unlocking button  
gage compartment is not visible.  
of the lug-  
Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the locking  
button clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest.  
£
Seats and Stowage 97  
B
C
Insert the securing strap  
into the lock  
until it is heard to lock in place.  
Side compartments  
B
On vehicles fitted with a luggage net partition, guide the securing strap  
around  
the housing when the net partition is rolled up. After fixing the luggage net parti-  
tion in place, it is not longer possible to unroll the luggage net partition.  
WARNING  
After placing skis into the through-loading bag, you must secure the bag  
B
with the securing strap  
.
A
The strap  
must hold the skis tight.  
A
Make sure that the strap  
holds the skis in front of the binding (see also  
imprint on the removeable through-loading bag).  
Fig. 105 Luggage compartment: Side compartment - left/right.  
Note  
You can open the compartment by turning the locks in the direction of arrow  
The through-loading bag is foreseen for four pairs of skis. The total weight of  
⇒ꢀfig. 105.  
the skis which are transported must not exceed 17 kg.  
On some vehicles the battery is located in the left compartment ⇒ꢀpage 204. This  
compartment is marked by the symbol and can be opened by turning the locks  
e.g with a coin or using a flat screwdriver.  
You must put the skis and the sticks in the removeable through-loading bag  
with the tips facing the rear.  
If there are several pairs of skis in the removeable through-loading bag, en-  
sure that the bindings are positioned at the same height.  
The removeable through-loading bag must never be folded together or stow-  
In the right compartment ⇒ꢀfig. 105 is located the CD changer, the TV tuner and  
the first-aid box.  
ed when moist.  
Lockable side compartment (Combi)  
Clothes hooks  
The clothes hooks are located on the middle pillar and on the handle of the head-  
liner above each of the rear doors.  
WARNING  
Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision  
to the rear.  
Use the hooks for hanging only light items of clothing and ensure that  
Fig. 106 Luggage compartment: Locka-  
ble side compartment  
there are no heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.  
The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg.  
Open the compartment by pulling at the handle in direction of arrow ⇒ꢀfig. 106.  
Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise this  
will interfere with the protection offered by the head airbag.  
The CD changer, the TV Tuner are housed in this compartment.  
You can also house the first-aid box and the warning triangle in this compartment.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
98 Seats and Stowage  
Non-lockable side compartment (Combi)  
Fig. 107 Non-lockable side compartment  
The cover of the side compartment can be removed and thus the luggage com-  
partment can be enlarged.  
Grasp the cover on the top part and carefully remove it in direction of arrow  
⇒ꢀfig. 107.  
CAUTION  
Make sure that the cover of the side compartment is not damaged when installing  
or removing.  
The air conditioning system 99  
The air conditioning system  
tem. This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is oper-  
ating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense (re-  
placement of compressor).  
Introduction  
Description and information  
Please refer to the information regarding the recirculated air mode for air-con-  
ditioning ⇒ꢀpage 102 or for Climatronic ⇒ꢀpage 105.  
To ensure that the air conditioning system works properly, do not block up the  
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat out-  
put only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.  
air outlet vents with any objects.  
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in  
the vehicle. The wellbeing of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of  
this particularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity. The system  
prevents the windows misting up during the cold season of the year.  
Using the air conditioning system economically  
The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when  
in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption.  
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode in order to enhance the cool-  
ing effect - air-conditoining system ⇒ꢀpage 102, Climatronic ⇒ꢀpage 105.  
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order  
to ensure that the heating and cooling systems operate properly.  
It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the inte-  
rior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to al-  
low the heated air to escape.  
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air condi-  
tioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is quite normal  
and not an indication of a leak!  
The cooling system should not be switched on while travelling when the window  
is open.  
The desired interior temperature can also be achieved without switching in the  
cooling system just by switching to fresh air mode.  
WARNING  
For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the win-  
For the sake of the environment  
When you economize on fuel, you also reduce pollutant emissions.  
dows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about how  
to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to demist and  
defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode.  
Operational problems  
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time,  
as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your at-  
tention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident  
increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin  
misting up.  
If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than +5 °C,  
there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be:  
The fuse on the air conditioning system has blown. Check the fuse, replace it if  
necessary ⇒ꢀpage 229.  
The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because  
Note  
The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage  
compartment.  
We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air  
the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot ⇒ꢀpage 11.  
If you are not able to rectify the operational problem yourself, or if the cooling ca-  
pacity decreases, switch the cooling system off. Contact a specialist garage.  
mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the in-  
terior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning sys-  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
100 The air conditioning system  
Redirecting air flow  
Air outlet vents  
The horizontal as well as the vertical direction of the air flow is set with the  
moveable handle in the middle of the relevant air outlet vents.  
The air outlet vents 2, 3 ⇒ꢀfig. 108 and 5 ⇒ꢀfig. 109 can be closed and opened indi-  
vidually.  
Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the opened air outlet vents according to  
the setting of control dial and the outside atmospheric conditions.  
Air conditioning system (manual air conditioning  
system)  
Description  
Fig. 108 Air vents at the front  
The air conditioning system is a combined cooling and heating sys-  
tem. It makes it possible to optimally control the air temperature at  
any season of the year.  
Description of the air conditioning system  
It is important for your safety and for your driving comfort that the air conditioning  
system is operating properly.  
AC  
1
The cooling only operates if button  
conditions are met:  
⇒ꢀfig. 110  
is pressed, and the following  
engine running,  
outside temperature above approx. +2 °C and  
blower switch switched on (positions 1 to 4).  
Air at a temperature of about 5°C may flow out of the vents under certain circum-  
stances when the cooling system is operating. Lengthy and uneven distribution of  
the air flow out of the vents and large differences in temperature, for example  
when getting out of the vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.  
Fig. 109 Air vents at the rear  
Open air outlet vents  
Turn the rotary knob to position .  
Note  
Close air outlet vents  
Turn the rotary knob to position 0.  
We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a spe-  
cialist garage once every year.  
The air conditioning system 101  
Rear window heater  
Using the system  
2
Press button  
. Further information ⇒ꢀpage 64.  
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating)  
3
Press the button  
in order to directly switch on/off the auxiliary heating  
(auxiliary heating and ventilation. Further information ⇒ꢀpage 106.  
Note  
The whole heat output will be needed to unfrost the windscreen and side win-  
dows. No warm air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to restriction of the  
heating comfort.  
AC  
lights after activation, even if not all of the conditions for  
The warning light  
the function of the cooling system have been met. As a result, the readiness for  
cooling is signalled when all conditions are satisfied ⇒ꢀpage 100, Description of  
the air conditioning system.  
Fig. 110 The air conditioning system: Control elements  
Setting temperature  
A
Turn the control dial  
ture.  
⇒ꢀfig. 110 to the right in order to increase the tempera-  
A
Turn the control dial  
to the left in order to increase the temperature.  
Controlling blower  
B
B
Turn the blower switch  
the blower on.  
into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in order to switch  
Turn the blower switch  
into position 0 in order to switch the blower off.  
4
If you wish to shut off the fresh air supply, use the button  
- recirculated  
air mode ⇒ꢀpage 102.  
Control for air distribution  
You can adjust the direction of the inlet air flow ⇒ꢀpage 100 using air distribu-  
C
tion regulator  
.
switching cooling on and off  
AC  
1
Press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 110. The warning light lights up in the button.  
AC  
When you again press the switch  
, the cooling system is switched off. The  
warning light in the button goes out.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
102 The air conditioning system  
Setting air conditioning system  
Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning sys-  
tem for the respective operating modes:  
Setting of the control dial  
Set-up  
Button  
Air outlet vents 2  
A
B
C
1
4
Defrost windscreen and side  
windows - free from mist  
Desired tempera-  
ture  
Automatically  
switched on  
Open and align with the side  
window  
3 or 4  
Do not switch on  
Briefly switched on  
Do not switch on  
Briefly switched on  
Do not switch on  
Do not switch on  
a)  
b)  
To the right up to  
the stop  
The fastest heating  
Comfortable heating  
The fastest cooling  
Optimal cooling  
3
Switched off  
Switched off  
Activated  
Opening  
Opening  
Desired tempera-  
ture  
2 or 3  
 
To the left up to  
the stop  
briefly 4, then  
2 or 3  
Opening  
Desired tempera-  
ture  
1, 2 or 3  
Activated  
Open and align to the roof  
Opening  
To the left up to  
the stop  
Fresh air mode - ventilation  
Desired position  
Switched off  
a)  
b)  
In countries with high humidity, we recommend you do not use this setting. This can result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside.  
1
The warning light in the  
button lights after activation, even if not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system have been met. As a result, the readiness for cooling is signalled when all conditions  
are satisfied ⇒ꢀpage 100, Description of the air conditioning system.  
Switching recirculated air mode on  
Note  
Controls  
4
Press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 110 the warning light lights up in the button.  
A
B
C
1
4
,
,
and the  
button and  
⇒ꢀfig. 110.  
Air outlet vents 2 ⇒ꢀfig. 108.  
We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 ⇒ꢀfig. 108 in the opened  
Switching recirculated air mode off  
Press again the button  
- the warning light in the button goes out.  
position.  
The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution con-  
C
trol  
is in position ⇒ꢀfig. 110. You can also switch recirculated air mode on  
Recirculated air mode  
£
again from this setting by repeatedly pressing pushbutton  
.
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehi-  
cle and then fed back into the interior.  
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into  
the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traf-  
fic jam.  
The air conditioning system 103  
Aeration of the vehicle when ignition is switched off  
WARNING  
On models fitted with power sliding/tilting roof with sollar cells, the fresh air  
blower is automatically switched over to “solar mode” if the sun ray's are suffi-  
cient after switching off the ignition. The solar cells on the sliding/tilting roof de-  
liver power for the fresh air blower. This supplies the interior of the car with fresh  
air.  
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as  
“stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your atten-  
tion and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident in-  
creases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin mist-  
ing up.  
For an optimum ventilation, the air outlet vents 2 and 3 must be opened ⇒ꢀfig. 108.  
The ventilation functions only when the sliding/tilting roof is closed.  
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)  
Note  
We recommend that you have Climatronic cleaned by a specialist garage once  
Description  
every year.  
On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio or radio navigation system,  
The Climatronic system is an automatic heating, fresh air and cool-  
ing system which provides optimal comfort for the occupants of the  
car.  
the information of the Climatronic is also shown on the display. This function can  
be switched off, see operating instructions of the radio or the radio navigation  
system.  
The Climatronic maintains fully automatically a convenience temperature. This is  
achieved by automatically varying the temperature of the outflowing air, the  
blower stages and the air distribution. The system also takes into account sun-  
light which eliminates the need to alter the settings manually. The automatic  
mode ⇒ꢀpage 104 ensures maximum wellbeing of the occupants at all times of  
the year.  
Overview of the control elements  
The controls enable a separate setting of the temperature for the  
left and right side.  
Description of Climatronic system  
The cooling operates only if the following conditions are met:  
engine running,  
outside temperature above approx. +2 °C,  
AC  
switched on.  
The AC compressor is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to pro-  
vide cooling at a high load of the engine.  
Recommended setting for all periods of the year:  
Set the desired temperature, we recommend 22 °C.  
AUTO  
Press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 111.  
Fig. 111 Climatronic: Control elements  
Move the air outlet vents 2 and 3 so that the air flow is directed slightly up-  
£
wards.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
104 The air conditioning system  
The buttons  
AUTO  
. In the right or left top corner a warning light lights up,  
Press the button  
depending on which unit was last selected.  
1
Defrost windscreen intensively  
AUTO  
If the warning light in the top right corner of the button  
lights up, the Clima-  
2
3
4
5
6
Air flow to the windows  
tronic operates in “HIGH” mode. The “HIGH” mode is the standard setting of the  
Climatronic.  
Air flow to head  
Air flow in the footwell  
Recirculated air mode  
AUTO  
When pressing again the button  
, the Climatronic changes into the “LOW”  
with air quality sensor  
mode and the warning light in the top left corner lights up. The Climatronic uses  
only in this mode the lower blower speed. However taking into account the noise  
level, this is more comfortable, yet be aware that the effectiveness of the air con-  
ditioning system is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occupied.  
Rear window heater  
Buttons / control dial  
7
Setting of the temperature for the left side, operation of the seat heating of  
the left front seat  
AUTO  
By pressing again the button  
, you change into the “HIGH” mode.  
AUTO  
8
9
Automatic mode  
The automatic mode is switched off by pressing the button for the air distribution  
or increasing or decreasing the blower speed. The temperature is nevertheless  
regulated.  
OFF  
Switching off Climatronic  
Setting the blower speed  
Depending upon vehicle equipment: Button for direct switching on/off of aux-  
iliary heating ⇒ꢀpage 106, or switching on/off of windscreen heater  
10  
11  
switching cooling on and off  
⇒ꢀpage 64  
12  
13  
14  
DUAL  
Switching on/off of the temperature setting in dual mode  
Switching cooling on and off  
Setting of the temperature for the right side, operation of the seat heating of  
the right front seat  
switching cooling on and off  
AC  
AC  
Press the button  
. The warning light lights up in the button.  
AC  
When you again press the switch  
, the cooling system is switched off. The  
warning light in the button goes out. Only the function of the ventilation re-  
mains active when no lower temperature than the outside temperature can be  
reached.  
Note  
Below the top row of buttons is located the interior temperature sensor. Do not  
glue or cover over the sensor, otherwise it could have an unfavourable effect on  
the Climatronic.  
Setting temperature  
You can separate the interior temperature for the left and right side separately.  
Automatic mode  
You can set the temperature for both sides after switching on the ignition  
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant tem-  
perature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car.  
7
with the control dial  
.
14  
If you wish to set the temperature for the right side, turn the control dial  
DUAL  
.
The warning light in the button  
lights up, this indicates that differing  
Switching automatic mode on  
temperatures for the left and right side can be set.  
Set a temperature between +18 °C and +26 °C.  
DUAL  
If the warning light in the button  
lights up, the temperature for both sides  
Move the air outlet vents 2 and 3 ⇒ꢀfig. 108, so that the air flow is directed  
7
cannot be set with the control dial . You can reinitiate this function by pressing  
slightly upwards.  
DUAL  
the button  
. The warning light in the button which indicates the possibility to  
£
set differing temperatures for the left and right side, goes out.  
The air conditioning system 105  
You can set the interior temperature between +18°C and +26 °C. The interior tem-  
perature is regulated automatically within this range. If you chose a temperature  
lower than +18 °C, a blue symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale. If you  
chose a temperature higher than +26 °C, a red symbol lights up at the end of the  
numerical scale. In both limit positions the Climatronic operates at maximum cool-  
ing or heating capacity, respectively. The temperature is not controlled in this  
case.  
Switching recirculated air mode off  
AUTO  
Press the button  
or press the button  
repetitively, until the warning  
lights in the button go out.  
WARNING  
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as  
“stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your atten-  
tion and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident in-  
creases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin mist-  
ing up.  
Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (in particular at  
the leg area) and large differences in temperature, for example when getting out  
of the vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.  
Recirculated air mode  
Note  
1
If the windscreen mists up, press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 111. After the wind-  
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehi-  
cle and then fed back into the interior. When the automatic air dis-  
tribution control is switched on, an air quality sensor measures the  
concentration of pollutants in the drawn in air.  
AUTO  
screen has been demisted, press the button  
.
The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside temperature  
is higher than approx. 2 °C.  
Controlling blower  
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into  
the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traf-  
fic jam. If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognized by  
the air quality sensor, when the automatic air distribution control is switched on,  
the air distribution control will temporarily be switched off. If the concentration of  
pollutants decreases to the normal level, the air distribution control is automati-  
cally switched off so that fresh air can be guided into the vehicle interior.  
There are a total of seven blower stages available.  
The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the  
interior temperature. You can also, however, adapt the blower stages manually to  
suit your particular needs.  
Press again the button  
on the left side (reduce blower speed) or on the  
Switching recirculated air mode on  
right side (increase blower speed).  
Press the button repeatedly  
button lights up.  
until the warning light on the left side of the  
If you switch off the blower, the Climatronic is switched off.  
The set blower speed is displayed above the button  
ber of warning lights come on.  
when the respective num-  
Switch on automatic air distribution control  
Press the button repeatedly  
button lights up.  
until the warning light on the right side of the  
WARNING  
Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily  
“Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce atten-  
tion levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-  
dent increases.  
If the air quality sensor does not switch on the air distribution control auto-  
matically when there is a nauseating smell, you can switch it on yourself by  
pressing the button  
side.  
. The warning light lights up in the button on the left  
Do not switch the Climatronic system off for longer than necessary.  
Switch the Climatronic system on as soon as the windows mist up.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
106 The air conditioning system  
Defrosting windscreen  
WARNING  
The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms - risk of poi-  
Defrosting windscreen - switching on  
soning!  
Press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 111.  
The auxiliary heating must not be running during refueling - risk of fire.  
Defrosting windscreen - switching off  
The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of  
AUTO  
Once again press the button  
or the button  
.
the vehicle. Therefore do not place the vehicle, if you wish to operate the aux-  
iliary heating, in such a way that the exhaust gases of the auxiliary heating  
can come easily into contact with inflammable materials (e.g. dry grass) or  
easily inflammable substances (e.g. fuel run out).  
Press the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 111.  
The temperature control is controlled automatically. More air flows out of the air  
outlet vents 1.  
Note  
If the auxiliary heating runs, the fuel consumption comes from the vehicle tank.  
The auxiliary heating automatically controls the filling level in the fuel tank. If only  
a low quantity of fuel is present in the fuel tank, the function of the auxiliary heat-  
ing is blocked.  
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)  
Description and important information  
The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating, which is located on the underside of  
the vehicle, must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked.  
If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is running, the vehicle battery discharg-  
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) heats or  
supplies the interior of the vehicle with fresh air independent of the  
engine.  
es. If the auxiliary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a  
longer period, the vehicle must be driven a few kilometers in order to recharge the  
vehicle battery.  
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating)  
The auxiliary heating only switches the blower on, if it has achieved a coolant  
temperature of approx. 50 °C.  
At low outside temperatures, this can result in a formation of water vapour in  
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) functions in connection with the air-con-  
ditioning system or Climatronic.  
It can be used when stationary, when engine is switched off for preheating of the  
vehicle as well as while driving (e.g. during the heating phase of the engine).  
the area of the engine compartment. This is quite normal and is not an operating  
problem.  
The engine is also preheated when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is  
switched off, if the auxiliary heating is switched on. This is not valid for vehicles  
with 3.6 ltr./191 kW FSI engine.  
riod.  
After switching off the auxiliary heating, the coolant pump runs for a short pe-  
The auxiliary heating and ventilation does not switch on or comes on, if the  
vehicle battery indicates a low loading state ⇒ꢀpage 208, Automatic consumer  
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) warms up the coolant during the combus-  
tion of fuel from the vehicle tank. The coolant warms up the air, which (if the  
blower speed is not set to zero) flows into the occupant compartment.  
shut-off.  
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) does not switch on, if the following  
was shown in the information display or before switching off the ignition: Please  
refuel!  
Auxiliary ventilation  
£
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by  
switching off the engine, whereby the interior temperature is effectively de-  
creased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun).  
The air conditioning system 107  
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in  
order to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly.  
So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the auxili-  
By selecting the menu point Back, you will reach one level higher in the menu  
Aux. Heating.  
In the menu Aux. heating select the menu point Running time and set the de-  
sired operating time in steps of 5 minutes. The running time can be 10 to 60  
minutes.  
ary heating, you must maintain the comfort temperature normally selected by you,  
leave the fan switched on and leave the air outlet vents in an open position. It is  
recommended to put the air flow in the position or .  
By selecting the menu point Back, you will reach in the menu Aux. heating.  
In the menu Aux. heating select the menu point Mode.  
Direct switching on/off  
In the menu Mode select the desired mode Heating or Ventilation.  
Programming  
For the programming of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) in  
the menu Aux. heating there are three pre-set times:  
Starting time 1  
Starting time 2  
Starting time 3  
Fig. 112 Button for direct switching on/  
off of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary  
heating and ventilation) on the operat-  
ing part of the air conditioning system  
In each pre-set time, the day and the time (hour and minute) can be set for  
switching on the auxiliary heating and/or ventilation.  
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) can be switched on or off  
at any time directly using the button on the operating part of the air-condition-  
ing system ⇒ꢀfig. 112 or on the operating part of the Climatronic.  
If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is not switched off earlier, it switches off  
automatically after the expiration of the set operating period, in the menu Run-  
ning time.  
An empty position can be found between Sunday and Monday when selecting the  
day. If this empty position is selected, the activation is performed without taking  
into account the day.  
If you leave the pre-set menu by selecting the menu Back or do not make changes  
on the display for longer than 10 seconds, the set values are stored, but the pre-  
set time is not active.  
Using the system  
Both other pre-set times can be programmed and stored in the same way.  
Only one programmed pre-set time can be active.  
So that the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)  
functions according to your expectations, it is necessary to carry  
out the basic setting before its programming.  
The last programmed pre-set time remains active.  
After the auxiliary heating activates at the set time, it is necessary to pre-set a  
time again.  
Basic setting  
Changing the active pre-set time is carried out after selecting the menu point Ac-  
tivate in the menu Aux. heating by selecting a pre-set time.  
On the information display, select in the Main menu the menu point Aux. heat-  
ing.  
The prerequisite for the correct switching on of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary  
heating and ventilation) according to the programmed pre-set time is the correct  
setting of the current time and the weekday ⇒ꢀpage 107.  
In the menu Aux. heating select the menu point Day of the wk. and set to-  
day's date.  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
108 The air conditioning system  
If the system is running, a warning light in the button for direct switching on/off  
of the auxiliary heating lights up.  
The auxiliary heating can only be switched on or off with the radio remote control,  
if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle is at least 2 m.  
The running system deactivates after expiration of the operating period or is de-  
activated earlier by pressing the button for direct switching on/off of the auxiliary  
heating ⇒ꢀpage 107.  
A random pre-set time can be deactivated by selecting the menu point Deactivate  
in the menu Activate.  
Warning light in the radio remote control  
The warning light in the radio remote control ⇒ꢀfig. 113 indicates after a keystroke  
if the remote control signal was received by the auxiliary heating and if the bat-  
tery is adequately charged.  
Display warning light  
Description  
After selecting the menu Factory setting in the menu Aux. heating, it is possible  
to return to the factory setting.  
Lights up green for 2 seconds.  
Lights up red for 2 seconds.  
Slowly flashes green for 2 seconds.  
The auxiliary heating was switched on.  
The auxiliary heating was switched off.  
The ignition signal was not received.  
Radio remote control  
The auxiliary heating is blocked, e. g  
because the tank is nearly empty or  
there is a fault in the auxiliary heating.  
Quickly flashes green for 2 seconds.  
Flashes red for 2 seconds.  
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) can be  
switched on or off with the remote control.  
The switch off signal was not received.  
Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then  
green or red.  
The battery is weak, however the  
switching on or off signal was received.  
Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then  
flashes green or red.  
The battery is weak, however the  
switching on or off signal was not re-  
ceived.  
Flashes orange for 5 seconds.  
The battery is discharged, however the  
switching on or off signal was not re-  
ceived.  
CAUTION  
Fig. 113 Auxiliary heating: Radio remote control/bottom of the radio remote control with the  
battery cover  
There are electronic components in the radio remote control, protect the remote  
control against water, severe shocks and direct sun rays.  
ON  
For switching on, press the button  
For switching off, press the button  
.
Changing the battery of the radio remote control  
OFF  
.
The transmitter and the battery are housed in the housing of the remote control.  
The receiver is located in the interior of the car.  
If the warning light of the radio remote control indicates a weak or discharged  
battery, ⇒ꢀfig. 113, it must be replaced. The battery is located under a cover on the  
back of the radio remote control.  
If the battery is properly charged, the effective range is up to 600 m. For switching  
on or off the auxiliary heating, hold the remote control vertically with the antenna  
Insert a flat, blunt object, such as a coin, into the gap of the battery cover, turn  
it against the direction of the arrow up to the mark, and unlock the cover  
⇒ꢀfig. 113 - right.  
A
⇒ꢀfig. 113 towards the top. You must not cover over the antenna with the fin-  
gers or the palm of the hand. Obstacles between the radio remote control and the  
vehicle, bad weather conditions and a weaker battery can clearly reduce the  
range.  
Change the battery, replace the battery cover and lock it by moving it in the  
direction of the arrow.  
£
The air conditioning system 109  
For the sake of the environment  
Dispose of a used battery in accordance with environmental regulations.  
Note  
tery.  
Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.  
The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original bat-  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
110 Starting-off and Driving  
Starting-off and Driving  
Setting steering wheel position  
WARNING (Continued)  
If you adjust the steering wheel further towards the head, you will reduce  
the protection offered by the driver airbag in the event of an accident. Check  
that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest.  
When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer  
edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering wheel  
firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another way (e.g. in the middle of the  
steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge). In such cases, injuries to  
the arms, the hands and the head can occur when the driver airbag is de-  
ployed.  
Fig. 114 Adjustable steering wheel: Lever below the steering wheel/safe distance to the  
steering wheel  
Ignition lock  
You can set the height and the forward/back position of the steering wheel to the  
desired position.  
Adjust the driver seat ⇒ꢀpage 72.  
Pull the lever below the steering wheel down ⇒ꢀfig. 114 - left ⇒ꢀ  
Set the steering wheel to the desired position (concerning height and forward/  
back position).  
.
Push the lever upwards as far as the stop.  
Fig. 115 Ignition lock positions  
WARNING  
Petrol engines  
You must not adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving!  
1
- ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be locked.  
- ignition switched on  
The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel  
2
3
⇒ꢀfig. 114 - right. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the  
- start engine  
airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!  
For safety reasons the lever must always be firmly pushed up to avoid the  
Diesel engines  
steering wheel altering its position unintentionally when driving - risk of acci-  
dent!  
1
- interruption of fuel supply, ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can  
be locked.  
2
- heating glow plugs on, ignition switched on  
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating  
£
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.  
Starting-off and Driving 111  
3
- start engine  
Starting the engine  
Applies to all models:  
General  
1
Position  
To lock the steering, with the ignition key withdrawn, turn the steering wheel un-  
til the steering locking pin is heard to engage. You should always lock the steering  
as a general rule if you leave your vehicle. This acts as a deterrent against possible  
You can only start the engine only using an original ignition key.  
Manual gearbox  
theft of your vehicle ⇒ꢀ  
.
Place the gearshift lever into neutral and put on the handbrake firmly before  
starting the engine.  
2
Position  
Engage the clutch pedal and keep it depressed until the engine starts.  
Move the steering wheel back and forward a little if the ignition key cannot, or  
cannot easily be turned into this position, in order to release the steering lock.  
If you start the engine without depressing the clutch pedal, the engine does not  
start and the following message appears in the Information display Depress  
clutch! (Depress clutch!) or CLUTCH in the display of the instrument cluster.  
3
Position  
The engine is started in this position. At the same time switched on low beam or  
main beam or other electrical components with major power consumption are  
Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts otherwise there may be damage  
to the starter.  
2
briefly switched off. The ignition key moves back into position  
ses the key.  
when one relea-  
Automatic gearbox  
1
The ignition key must be turned back into position  
each time before starting  
Place the gearshift lever into P or N before starting the engine, and apply the  
handbrake firmly.  
the engine again. The starter repeat lock in the ignition lock prevents the starter  
being engaged when the engine is running and thus getting damaged.  
On vehicles equipped with the KESSY system, engage the clutch pedal and  
keep it depressed until the engine starts.  
Ignition key withdrawal lock (automatic gearbox)  
You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the selec-  
tor lever is in position P.  
If you start the engine without depressing the brake pedal, the engine does not  
start and the following message appears in the Information display Depress brake  
pedal! or BRAKE in the display of the instrument cluster. At the same time, the  
warning light lights up.  
WARNING  
2
When driving, the ignition key must always be in the position  
(ignition  
Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts otherwise there may be damage  
to the starter.  
switched on) without the engine running. This position is indicated by the  
warning lights coming on. If this is not the case, it could result in unexpected  
locking of the steering wheel - risk of accident!  
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after  
starting the cold engine until oil pressure can be built up in the hydraulic valve  
clearance compensation. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.  
Only remove the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has  
come to a standstill (by applying the handbrake or moving the selector lever  
into the position P). The steering lock can engage immediately - risk of acci-  
dent!  
If the engine does not start ...  
£
You can use the battery of another vehicle as a jump-start aid ⇒ꢀpage 224.  
Always withdraw the ignition key if you are going to leave the vehicle,  
even for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the  
vehicle. The children might otherwise start the engine or switch on electrical  
equipment (e.g. power windows) - risk of accident or injury!  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
112 Starting-off and Driving  
WARNING  
Diesel engines  
Never run the engine in non ventilated or enclosed areas. The exhaust  
Glow plug system  
gases of the engine contain besides the odorless and colourless carbon mon-  
oxide a poisonous gas - hazard! Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness  
and death.  
Diesel engines are equipped with a glow plug system, the preglow period being  
controlled automatically in line with the coolant temperature and outside temper-  
ature.  
Never leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running.  
The preglow indicator light comes on after the ignition has been switched on.  
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating  
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.  
CAUTION  
3
The starter may only be operated (ignition key position ), if the engine is not  
running. If the starter is immediately operated after switching off the engine, the  
starter or the engine can be damaged.  
You should start the engine immediately after the glow plug warning light   
has gone out.  
Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads as long as  
The glow plug warning light will come on for about one second if the engine is  
the engine has not yet reached its normal operating temperature - risk of damag-  
ing the engine!  
at a normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5°C.  
This means that you can start the engine right away.  
Do not tow start the engine - danger of damaging the engine. On vehicles with  
Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start  
right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.  
It is possible that the fuse on the diesel preglow system is defect if the engine  
still does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary ⇒ꢀpage 229.  
Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.  
a catalytic converter, unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it  
may ignite. This in turn may damage or destroy the catalytic converter. You can  
use the battery of another vehicle as a jump-start aid ⇒ꢀpage 224, Jump-starting.  
For the sake of the environment  
Never warm up the engine when the vehicle is standing. Drive off right away.  
Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the  
pollutant emissions are lower.  
Starting the engine after the fuel tank has run dry  
It may take longer than normal to start the engine after refuelling if the fuel tank  
has run completely dry - up to one minute. This is because the fuel system must  
first of all be filled while the attempting to start the engine.  
Petrol engines  
Switching off the engine  
These engines are fitted with a starter system which selects the correct fuel-air  
mixture for every external air temperature.  
The engine can be switched off by turning the ignition key from position  
1
⇒ꢀfig. 115 into position  
.
Do not operate accelerator before and when starting engine.  
Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start  
right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.  
It is possible that the fuse on the electrical fuel pump is defect if the engine  
still does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary ⇒ꢀpage 229.  
Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.  
WARNING  
Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary - risk of acci-  
dent!  
The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. Greater  
physical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off. Because if  
you do not stop as normal, this can cause an accident and severe injuries.  
It may be necessary, if the engine is very hot, to slightly depress the accelerator  
after the engine has started.  
£
Starting-off and Driving 113  
CAUTION  
Note  
you should not switch the engine off right away at the end of your journey after  
the engine has been operated for a lengthy period at high loads but should be al-  
lowed it to run at idling speed for about 2 minutes. This prevents any accumula-  
tion of heat when the engine is switched off.  
One should not lay the hand on the shift lever while driving the vehicle. The  
pressure of the hand will be transferred to the gearshift forks in the gearbox. This  
can, over a period of time, lead to early wear of the gearshift forks.  
Depress the clutch pedal fully when changing gears, in order to avoid unneces-  
sary wear and damage.  
Note  
The radiator fan may continue running for a further 10 minutes or so after the  
engine and the ignition have been switched off. The coolant fan may, however, al-  
so switch on again after some time if the coolant temperature rises because of an  
accumulation of heat in the engine or if the engine is warm and the engine com-  
partment is additionally heated by strong sunlight.  
Pedals  
Operation of the pedals must not be hindered!  
This is why particular care is required when carrying out any work in the en-  
WARNING  
gine compartment ⇒ꢀpage 198, Working in the engine compartment.  
In the driver's footwell, only a footmat, which is attached to the two corre-  
sponding attachment points, may be used.  
No objects are allowed in the driver's footwell – risk of obstruction or limi-  
Shifting (manual gearbox)  
tation in operating the pedal!  
Note  
Greater brake pedal distances may be needed when there is a fault in the  
brake system.  
Use only footmats from the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories, which are at-  
tached at two attachment points.  
Fig. 116 The shift pattern: 5-speed or 6-  
speed manual gearbox  
Handbrake  
Shift into reverse only when the car is stationary. Depress the clutch pedal and  
hold it fully depressed. Wait a moment before engaging reverse gear in order to  
avoid any shift noises.  
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the igni-  
tion is on.  
WARNING  
Never engage the reverse gear when driving - risk of accident!  
Fig. 117 Centre console: Handbrake  
Breakdown assistance Technical data  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
114 Starting-off and Driving  
Applying the handbrake  
Unlocking and locking the steering  
Pull the handbrake lever up fully.  
Releasing the handbrake  
Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time press in the locking  
button ⇒ꢀfig. 117.  
Hold the button pressed and push the handbrake lever down fully ⇒ꢀ  
.
The handbrake warning light lights up when the handbrake is applied, provided  
the ignition is on.  
A warning signal sounds and the following text appears in the Information display  
if you have inadvertently driven off with the handbrake applied:  
Fig. 118 Starter button  
Release parking brake! (Release parking brake!)  
It is necessary that a valid key is in the vehicle in order to unlock the steering.  
The handbrake warning is activated if you drive at a speed of more than 6 km/h  
for more than 3 seconds.  
Unlocking the steering  
Open the driver door and enter the vehicle.  
When closing the driver door, the steering is unlocked within 2 seconds.  
WARNING  
Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake which  
Locking the steering  
is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating which will  
have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system - risk of accident!  
In addition this can result in premature wear of the rear brake pads.  
Bring the vehicle to a stop.  
Switch off the engine and/or the ignition by pressing the starter button  
⇒ꢀfig. 118.  
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The children might, for ex-  
ample, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear. The vehicle  
might then move off - risk of accident!  
When opening the driver door, the steering is locked.  
The steering is also locked after locking the vehicle.  
CAUTION  
If the steering is locked and the KESSY system does not manage to unlock the  
steering lock the first time (e.g. if the wheels rest against the curb), the attempt  
will be repeated twice by the system.  
After the car has come to a stop, always first of all apply the handbrake firmly be-  
fore then additionally engaging a gear (manual gearbox) or moving the selector  
lever into position P (automatic gearbox).  
Even if the steering lock is not released afterwards, the system will ask you to  
move the steering wheel with a message in the information display Move steering  
wheel! or in the display of the instrument cluster MOVE STEERING. In 2 seconds, 3  
additional attempts are made to unlock the steering wheel. At the same time, the  
warning light flashes.  
KESSY system  
Introduction  
Even if the steering lock is not released afterwards, the following message is dis-  
played for 10 seconds on vehicles with an information display Steering wheel still  
locked. .  
The KESSY system makes it possible to switch the ignition on/off and to start/  
stop the engine without actively using the key.  
£
Starting-off and Driving 115  
It is necessary to eliminate the possible cause which prevents the unlocking and  
repeat the attempt to unlock the steering.  
Emergency ignition shutoff system  
In an emergency it is possible to switch off the ignition even at speeds greater  
than 2 km/h, by way of the so-called emergency ignition shutoff system.  
Engine protection for electric steering lock  
The electric steering lock has an engine protection which slows down the locking  
and unlocking of the steering if the starter button is pressed repeatedly at short  
intervals.  
Press the starter button ⇒ꢀfig. 118 for longer than 1 second or press it twice  
within 1 second.  
Note  
WARNING  
After pressing the starter button while the steering is locked, the steering is  
Never switch off the ignition while driving, otherwise the steering and brake  
assist do no longer function - risk of accident!  
unlocked, the electrical components are activated (e.g. radio, navigation system  
etc.) and the igntion is switched on.  
If you do not exit or enter the vehicle again using the valid key after locking  
the steering, however you wish to unlock the steering, you must press the starter  
button. At the same time, electrical components are activated (e.g. radio, naviga-  
tion system etc.) and the ignition is switched on.  
Starting engine  
It is necessary that a valid key is in the vehicle, the steering is unlocked and the  
ignition is switched on in order to start the vehicle. On vehicles with manual gear-  
box, hold the clutch pressed when starting the vehicle, on vehicles with automatic  
gearbox move the selector lever into position P or N and hold the brake pedal  
pressed until the engine starts.  
If you switch off the ignition or the engine by pressing the starter button and  
if the driver door is already opened, the steering will not lock. In order to lock the  
steering, it is necessary to close and open the driver door again or to lock the ve-  
1
hicle with the aid of the sensor  
⇒ꢀfig. 14.  
Petrol engines  
Switching on the ignition  
Press the starter button ⇒ꢀfig. 118 until the engine has started.  
It is necessary that a valid key is in the vehicle and that the steering is unlocked in  
order to switch on the ignition.  
Diesel engines  
If the starter button is pressed during the whole preglow period, the engine  
starts after the warning light has gone out.  
The ignition is switched on by briefly pressing the starter button ⇒ꢀfig. 118.  
The diesel engine can also be started by pressing the starter button, the ignition  
is switched on and the preglow warning light lights up. You must wait until the  
preglow warning light goes out and then press the starter button again until  
the engine starts.  
Once you switch on the ignition and open the driver door, the message Switch off  
ignition! appears in the information display. Switch off ignition.  
Switching off the ignition  
If in an emergency, the engine must be started quickly (e.g. in a critical situation),  
you can start the engine by pressing the starter button again before the preglow  
warning light goes out.  
The ignition is switched off by briefly pressing the starter button ⇒ꢀfig. 118.  
The ignition can be switched off up to a speed of 2 km/h.  
WARNING  
On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox, the clutch must not be pressed after  
switching off the ignition otherwise the system would try to start.  
Never leave the key in the vehicle in the area where there are children, be-  
cause they can easily start the vehicle - risk of accident!  
£
On vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be in the  
position P or N and the brake pedal must not be pressed.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
116 Starting-off and Driving  
Note  
Note  
If the steering is locked while the engine is started, it is unlocked by pressing the  
starter button, the electrical components (e.g. radio, radio navigation system etc.)  
are activated, the ignition is switched on and the engine is started.  
The KESSY system is protected against inadvertently switching off the engine  
while driving, this means that the engine can only be switched off in an emergen-  
cy ⇒ꢀpage 115.  
Emergency start-up of engine  
Parking aid  
Rear parking aid  
The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles behind the vehicle.  
Fig. 119 Emergency start-up of engine  
if the check for the authorized key is not successful, the following message ap-  
pears in the instrument cluster Key not found or in the display of the instrument  
cluster NO KEY nd the emergency start-up of the engine must be carried out.  
Fig. 120 Parking aid: Detection range of  
rear sensors  
Press the starter button ⇒ꢀfig. 119 and then hold the key at the starter button  
or  
The audible parking aid determines the distance from the rear bumper to an ob-  
stacle behind the car with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The tones of the parking  
aid can be adapted in the menu of the Information display ⇒ꢀpage 19. The sensors  
are integrated in the rear bumper.  
press the starter button directly with the key.  
Note  
During an emergency start-up of the engine, the correct orientation of the key  
must be kept ⇒ꢀfig. 119.  
Range of sensors  
The clearance warning begins at a distance of about 160 cm from the obstacle  
A
(area  
⇒ꢀfig. 120). The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as  
Switching the engine off  
the clearance is reduced.  
B
A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm (area ) - danger  
area. You should not reverse any further after this signal sounds! If the vehicle is  
equipped with a factory-fitted towing device, the indication threshold of the dan-  
ger area starts - continuous tone - 5 cm further behind the vehicle. The vehicle  
can be extended through an installed detachable towing device.  
Bring the vehicle to a stop.  
Switch off the engine by pressing the starter button ⇒ꢀfig. 118, doing so  
switches off the ignition at the same time.  
£
Starting-off and Driving 117  
On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio or radio navigation system, the  
distance to the obstruction is shown graphically in the display. On vehicles with a  
factory-fitted towing device, the sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer.  
The driver is informed about this by a graphic display (vehicle towing a trailer) in  
the radio or the radio navigation display. The factory-fitted car stereo or radio nav-  
igation system can be set so that the play function volume decreases when acti-  
vating the parking aid, see Owner's Manual radio or radio navigation system. This  
improves the audibility of the parking aid.  
Front and rear parking aid  
The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles in front and behind  
the vehicle.  
Activating  
The parking aid is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and the  
ignition is turned on. This is confirmed by a brief audible signal.  
Deactivating  
The parking aid is deactivated by removing the reverse gear.  
Fig. 121 Activating the parking aid/parking aid: Detection range of the front sensors  
WARNING  
The audible parking aid determines the distance between the front or rear bump-  
er and an obstacle with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The sensors are integrated  
in the front and rear bumper. The signal tones for the front parking aid sound  
higher as standard than for the rear parking aid. The tones of the parking aid can  
be adapted in the menu of the Information display ⇒ꢀpage 19.  
The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention  
and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when parking the vehi-  
cle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.  
You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that there is no  
small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., behind your vehi-  
cle. Such an obstacle might not be within the range detected by the sensors.  
Range of sensors  
Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of  
The distance warning begins at a distance of about 120°cm from the obstacle in  
A
clothing cannot reflect the signal of the parking aid. Thus, these objects or  
people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the sensors of the park-  
ing aid.  
front of the vehicle (area  
⇒ꢀfig. 121) and about 160 cm from the obstacle behind  
A
the vehicle (area ). The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter  
as the clearance is reduced.  
B
A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm (area ) - danger  
Note  
area. From this moment on do not continue driving! If the vehicle is equipped  
with a factory-fitted towing device, the indication threshold of the danger area  
starts - continuous tone - 5 cm further behind the vehicle. The vehicle can be ex-  
tended through an installed detachable towing device.  
The parking aid does not operate if you are towing a trailer (applies to models  
which feature a factory-fitted towing device).  
If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after switching the ignition on  
and engaging reverse gear, and there is no obstacle close to your car, this indi-  
cates a system fault. Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.  
On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio or radio navigation system, the  
distance to the obstruction is shown graphically in the display. On vehicles with a  
factory-fitted towing device, the rear sensors are deactivated when towing a trail-  
er. The driver is informed about this by a graphic display (vehicle towing a trailer)  
in the radio or the radio navigation display. The factory-fitted car stereo or radio  
navigation system can be set so that the play function volume decreases when  
activating the parking aid, see Owner's Manual radio or radio navigation system.  
This improves the audibility of the parking aid.  
The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to  
operate properly.  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
118 Starting-off and Driving  
Activating  
Park Assist  
The parking aid is activated when the reverse gear is engaged and the ignition is  
switched on or by pressing the button ⇒ꢀfig. 121 - left, the symbol lights up in  
the button. The activation is confirmed by a brief acknowledgement signal.  
Description and important information  
The park assist assists you when parking in a suitable parallel parking space be-  
tween two vehicles or behind a vehicle.  
Deactivating  
The parking aid is deactivated after pressing the button  
of more than 10 km/h - the symbol  
⇒ꢀfig. 121 or at a speed  
in the button is no longer illuminated.  
The park assist automatically searches for suitable parking spaces after switching  
on the ignition and when driving up to 30 km/h.  
WARNING  
During the parking procedure the park assist only takes over the steering move-  
ments, the pedals continue to be operated by the driver.  
The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention  
and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when reversing the ve-  
hicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.  
Function of the system is based on:  
Length and depth measurement of the parking spaces when driving  
Evaluation of the size of the parking space  
Definition of the correct position of the vehicle for parking  
Calculating the line on which the vehicle drives backwards into the parking  
You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that there is no  
small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., in front or behind  
your vehicle. Such an obstacle might not be within the range detected by the  
sensors.  
space  
Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of  
Actuation of the steering force assistance, automatic spinning of the wheels  
clothing cannot reflect the signal of the parking aid. Thus, these objects or  
people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the sensors of the park-  
ing aid.  
of the front axle when parking.  
WARNING  
Note  
The park assist does not take away the responsability from the driver when  
parking.  
Only the front parking aid operates if you are towing a trailer (applies only to  
models which feature a factory-fitted towing device).  
Pay particular attention to small children and animals as they would not be  
recognised by the sensors of the parking aid.  
Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of  
clothing cannot reflect the signal of the park assist or the parking aid. Thus,  
these objects or people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the  
sensors of the parking aid.  
If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and  
there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The fault is  
confirmed additionally when the symbol flashes in the button ⇒ꢀfig. 121. Have  
the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.  
The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to  
operate properly.  
If the parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox  
is in the position , warning signal indicates interruption (vehicle can no longer  
move).  
The external sound source of the park assist and the parking aid can be  
disruptively influenced and under unfavourable conditions, objects or people  
cannot be recognised by the sensors of the parking aid.  
P
£
Starting-off and Driving 119  
Switch on display of the park assist in the information display  
CAUTION  
If other vehicles are parked behind or on the kurb, the park assist guides your  
vehicle beyond the kurb or onto it. Make sure that the wheels or the wheel rims of  
your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary intervene in time.  
You should satisfy yourself before parking that there is no small obstacle, such  
as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., in front or behind your vehicle. Such an  
obstacle might not be within the range detected by the sensors.  
Under certain circumstances, surfaces or structures of certain objects such as  
wire mesh fences, powder snow etc..., cannot be recognised by the system.  
The evaluation of the parking place and the parking procedure depends on the  
circumference of the wheels. Under certain circumstances, the system may not  
function correctly if your vehicle is mounted with wheels of non-permissible size,  
snow chains or a temporary spare wheel (in order to reach the nearest workshop).  
If the tyres other than those excepted by the manufacturer are mounted, the re-  
sulting position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly. This can be  
avoided through new calibration of the system in a specialist garage.  
Fig. 122 Switch on display of the park assist in the information display/information display:  
Finding a suitable parking space  
Switch on display of the park assist in the information display  
Press the button ⇒ꢀfig. 122.  
The accuracy of the evaluation for the parking space can be influenced by the  
Drive past the parking row up to maximum 30 km/h and with a distance of  
incorrectly determined outside temperature if the later is influenced by the ther-  
mal radiation of the engine i.e for stop and go in a traffic jam.  
0.5 m to 1.5 m ⇒ꢀfig. 122.  
In order to avoid damaging the sensors while cleaning with high-pressure  
Operate the turn signal for the driver's side if you wish to park on this side of the  
road. In the information display the search area for the parking space is indicated  
on the driver's side.  
cleaners or steam jets, the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short periods  
while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed.  
If the button is pressed above a speed of 30 km/h, the display appears in the dis-  
play of the instrument cluster as soon as you drive slower than 30 km/h.  
Note  
A component of the park assist is the front and rear parking aid.  
The electronic stability programme (ESP) must always be switched on for the  
parking procedure.  
Note  
If the park assist is switched on, a yellow warning light lights up in the button.  
Only the front parking aid operates if you are towing a trailer (applies only to  
models which feature a factory-fitted towing device). This is why it is not possible  
to park backwards with the help of the park assist when towing a trailer.  
The search for suitable parking spaces is automatic after switching on the ig-  
nition at speeds of more than 30 km/h. Searching for a parking space is performed  
at the same time on the driver and front passenger side.  
The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to  
operate properly.  
If the sensors find a suitable parking space, they store its parameters until an-  
other suitable parking space has been found or until a distance of 10 m had been  
driven after finding the parking space. This is why it is possible to switch on the  
park assist after driving past the parking space and the information on whether  
this parking space is suitable for parking appears in the information display.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
120 Starting-off and Driving  
Pay attention to the immediate area around the vehicle and using the pedal  
carefully reverse at a maximum speed of 7 km/h.  
Parking with the help of the park assist and concluding the  
parking procedure  
In the event that the parking procedure cannot be carried out in one go, pro-  
ceed to parking in further stages. If the forward arrow flashes in the informa-  
C
tion display  
the position D.  
⇒ꢀfig. 124, engage the 1st gear or move the selector lever into  
Please wait until the steering wheel turns automatically into the required po-  
sition and then using the pedal carefully drive forward at a speed of max.  
7 km/h.  
D
If the backward arrow flashes in the information display  
⇒ꢀfig. 124flashes in  
the information display, once again engage the reverse gear or move the se-  
lector lever into the position R.  
Please wait until the steering wheel turns automatically into the required po-  
sition and then carefully drive backwards. You can repeat these steps several  
times.  
Fig. 123 Information display: the determined parking space with the information to drive on  
A
B
and for engaging the reverse gear  
End the parking procedure due to the distance information provided by Park  
Assist.  
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and in  
the information display the following message appears: Steering interv. finished.  
Please take over steering! .  
Switch off park assist  
The park assist switches off during one of the following occurences:  
A speed of 30 km/h exceeded  
C
Fig. 124 Information display: Information for engaging the forward gear  
or the reverse  
A speed of 7 km/h exceeded during the parking procedure  
A time limit of 180 seconds exceeded for the parking procedure  
The button pressed for the park assist  
Parking aid activated  
Switch off TCS system  
D
gear  
The time limit for the parking procedure with the help of the park assist lasts  
180 seconds.  
If the Park Assist has recognised a suitable parking space, it is shown in the  
information display ⇒ꢀfig. 123.  
Intervention of the driver in the automatic steering procedure (stop the steer-  
ing wheel)  
B
Drive on further until the display  
⇒ꢀfig. 123 appears.  
disengage the reverse gear or take the selector lever out of the position R  
Bring the vehicle to a stop for at least 1 second.  
£
when reversing into the parking space.  
Engage the reverse gear or move the selector lever into the position R.  
As soon as the following message is shown in the information display: Steer-  
ing interv. active. Monitor area around veh.! (Steering intervention active. ,  
let go of the steering wheel, the steering will be taken over by the system.  
Starting-off and Driving 121  
Further warning and information texts of the park assist in the information  
display:  
Park Assist faulty. Workshop! (Park Assist faulty. Workshop!)  
The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exists on the park assist.  
Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.  
Park Assist finished. (Park Assist finished)  
The parking procedure has ended or after switching on the ignition, the vehicle  
has not been driven above 10 km/h.  
Steering interv. active. Monitor area around veh.! (Steering intervention active.  
Monitor around vehicle!)  
The Park Assist is active and takes over the steering movements. Observe the  
surroundings and carefully drive backwards, at the same time operate the pedal.  
Park Assist: Speed too high! (Park Assist: speed too high!)  
Reduce the speed below 30 km/h.  
Please take over steering! Finish parking manually! (Please take over steering!  
Finish parking manually!)  
Driver steering intervention: Please take over steering! (Driver steering  
intervention: Please take over steering!)  
Take over the steering. End the parking procedure without using the park assist.  
The parking procedure is ended through driver intervention.  
Speed too high! Please take over steering! (Speed too high. Please take over  
steering!)  
Park Assist finished. ASR deactivated. ASR deactivated.)  
The parking procedure cannot be carried out because the TCS system is switched  
off.  
The parking procedure was ended because the speed was exceeded.  
Park Assist: ASR intervention. (Park Assist:  
ASR deactivated. Please take over steering! (ASR deactivated. Please take over  
steering!)  
Intervention of the TCS while searching for a suitable parking place.  
The parking procedure was ended because the TCS system was switched off dur-  
ing the parking procedure.  
ASR intervention! Please take over steering! (ASR intervention. Please take over  
steering!)  
Parking procedure is ended through the intervention of the TCS.  
Trailer: Park Assist finished. (Trailer: Park Assist finished.)  
The parking procedure is not possible because the trailer is hitched and a plug is  
inserted in the socket of the towing device.  
Park Assist: Stationary time not sufficient. (Park Assist: Stationary time not  
sufficient.)  
The stationary time of the vehicle was less than 1 second.  
Time limit exceeded. Please take over steering! (Time limit exceeded. Please  
take over steering!)  
Park Assist: Speed too low. (Park Assist: Speed too low.)  
The parking procedure was ended because a time limit of 180 seconds for parking  
was exceeded.  
After the ignition is switched on, the vehicle must exceed the speed of 10 km/h at  
least once.  
Park Assist currently not available. (Park Assist currently not available.)  
The Park Assist cannot be switched on because a fault exists on the vehicle. Have  
the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.  
Park Assist ended. System currently not available.  
The parking procedure was ended because a fault exists on the vehicle. Have the  
fault rectified by a specialist workshop.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
122 Starting-off and Driving  
Storing a speed  
Cruise control system (CCS)  
Introduction  
The cruise control system (CCS) maintains a constant speed, more than 30 km/h  
(20 mph), once it has been set, without you having to depress the accelerator  
pedal. This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power out-  
put and braking power of the engine. The cruise control system makes it possible  
- particularly on long journeys - for you to rest your “accelerator foot”.  
Fig. 125 Operating lever: Rocker button  
and switch of the cruise control system  
WARNING  
For safety reasons, the cruise control system must not be used in dense  
traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces (such as icy roads, slippery roads,  
loose gravel) - risk of accident!  
A
The cruise control system is operated by means of the switch  
⇒ꢀfig. 125 and the  
B
rocker button  
in the left lever of the multi-functional switch.  
In order to prevent unintentional use of the cruise control system, always  
A
Press the switch  
into the position ON.  
switch off the system after use.  
B
After the desired speed has been reached, press the rocker button  
into the  
SET position.  
Note  
Models fitted with a manual gearbox: Always depress the clutch pedal if you  
switch on the cruise control system when the gearbox is in Neutral! Otherwise the  
engine can rev up unintentionally.  
B
After you have released the rocker button  
out of the position SET, the speed  
you have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress  
the accelerator.  
The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driv-  
You can increase the speed by depressing the accelerator. Releasing the accelera-  
tor will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed.  
ing on steep downhill sections. The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at  
which it travels. One should shift down in good time to a lower gear or slow the  
vehicle down by applying the foot brake.  
This does not apply, however, if you drive at a speed which is more than 10 km/h  
higher than the set speed for a period of longer than 5 minutes. The stored speed  
will be cancelled in the memory. You then have to re-store the desired speed.  
It is not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch on the  
cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position P, N or R.  
One can reduce the speed in the usual manner. The system is switched off tempo-  
rarily by actuating the brake or clutch pedal ⇒ꢀpage 123.  
WARNING  
First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that  
moment before resuming the stored speed.  
Starting-off and Driving 123  
Changing a stored speed  
WARNING  
You can also change the speed of the vehicle without depressing  
the accelerator.  
First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that  
moment before resuming the stored speed.  
Faster  
Switching off the cruise control system completely  
You can increase the stored speed without depressing the accelerator, by  
B
pressing the rocker button  
⇒ꢀfig. 125 in the RES position.  
A
Press the switch  
⇒ꢀfig. 125 to the right into position OFF.  
The speed of the car will increase continuously if you hold the rocker button  
pressed in the RES position. Once the car has reached the desired speed, re-  
lease the rocker button. The set speed is then stored in the memory.  
“(START-STOP)”  
Slower  
B
You can decrease the stored speed by pressing the rocker button  
SET- position.  
in the  
Holding down the rocker button pressed in the SET position will cause the  
speed of the vehicle to reduce continuously. Once the car has reached the de-  
sired speed, release the rocker button. The set speed is then stored in the  
memory.  
If you release the rocker button when the car is travelling at a speed of less  
than 30 km/h, the speed is not stored, the memory is erased. It is then neces-  
Fig. 126 START-STOP System button  
B
sary to again store the speed with the rocker button  
in the position SET  
after an increase in speed of the vehicle to more than 30 km/hour.  
The “START-STOP” system helps you to save fuel while at the same time reducing  
harmful exhaust emissions and CO emissions.  
2
The function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on.  
Switching off the cruise control system temporarily  
In the start-stop mode, the engine automatically switches to the vehicle's idle  
phase, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights.  
You can switch off the cruise control system temporarily by depressing the  
brake pedal or clutch pedal, on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox only  
with the brake pedal.  
Information regarding the current state of the “START-STOP” system is indicated  
in the display of the instrument cluster.  
You can switch off temporarily the cruise control system, if you press the  
A
switch  
in the middle position.  
Automatic engine shut down (stop phase)  
Stop the vehicle (where necessary, apply the handbrake).  
Take the vehicle out of gear.  
The set speed remains stored in the memory.  
The Resumption of the stored speed is achieved by releasing the brake or clutch  
Take your foot off the clutch.  
pedal, on vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox only after releasing the brake  
B
pedal and after shortly pressing the rocker button  
⇒ꢀfig. 125 into the position  
Automatic engine restart (start phase).  
Push down on the clutch.  
RES.  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
124 Starting-off and Driving  
Switching the “START-STOP” system on and off  
A high blower stage has been selected.  
The “START STOP” button is pressed.  
You can switch the “START STOP” system on/off by pressing the button ⇒ꢀfig. 126.  
When start-stop mode is deactivated, the warning light in the button lights up.  
Conditions for an automatic restart without driver intervention  
If the vehicle is in the stop phase when manually switching off the system, the en-  
gine starts immediately.  
The vehicle moves at a speed of more than 3 km/h.  
The difference between the outdoor- and the set temperature in the interior is  
too great.  
The “START-STOP” system is very complex. Some of the procedures are hard to  
check without servicing. The general conditions for the proper functioning of the  
“START-STOP” system are listed in the following overview.  
The charge state of the vehicle battery is not sufficient.  
The pressure in the brake system is not sufficient.  
Conditions for the automatic engine shut down (stop phase)  
Messages in the instrument cluster display (valid for vehicles without  
Information display)  
The gearshift lever is in Neutral.  
The clutch pedal is not pressed!  
ERROR: START STOP  
Error in the START-STOP system  
(ERROR: START STOP)  
The driver has fastened the seat belt.  
The driver's door is closed.  
START STOP NOT POSSIBLE  
START STOP ACTIVE  
SWITCH OFF IGNITION  
START MANUALLY  
Automatic engine shut down is not  
possible  
The bonnet is closed.  
Automatic engine shut down (stop  
phase)  
The vehicle is at a standstill.  
The factory-fitted towing device is not electrically connected to a trailer.  
The engine is at operating temperature.  
The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient.  
The stationary vehicle is not on a steep slope or a steep downhill section.  
The engine speed is less than 1200 1/min.  
The temperature of the vehicle battery is not too low or too high.  
The pressure in the brake system is sufficient.  
Switch off the ignition  
Start the engine manually  
WARNING  
The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is run-  
ning.  
Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off.  
The difference between the outdoor- and the set temperature in the interior is  
not too great.  
The vehicle speed since the last time the engine was switched off was greater  
than 3 km/h.  
CAUTION  
No cleaning of the diesel particle filter takes place ⇒ꢀpage 24  
The front wheels are not turned excessively (the steering angle is less than 3/4  
of a steering wheel revolution).  
If the “START-STOP” system is used at very high outside temperatures over a very  
long period of time, the vehicle battery can be damaged.  
£
Conditions for an automatic restart (start phase)  
The clutch is pressed.  
The max./min. temperature is set.  
The Defrost function for the windscreen is switched on.  
Starting-off and Driving 125  
Note  
Changes to the outdoor temperature can have an effect on the internal tem-  
perature of the vehicle battery even after several hours. If the vehicle remains  
outdoors for a long time in minus temperatures or in direct sunlight, it can take  
several hours until the internal temperature of the vehicle battery reaches a suita-  
ble temperature for proper operation of the “START STOP” system.  
In some instances it may be necessary to start the engine manually with the  
ignition key (e.g. when the seat belt is not inserted or the driver's door is opened  
for more than 30 seconds). Follow the messages in the instrument cluster display.  
If the Climatronic is running in automatic mode, under certain conditions, the  
engine may not switch off automatically.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
126 Automatic gearbox  
Automatic gearbox  
It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat surface.  
When parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake firmly and then  
move the selector lever into position P. This is to ensure that there is no excessive  
pressure acting on the lock mechanism and that it is easier to subsequently move  
the selector lever out of position P. If the selector lever is not in the P positin  
when the driver's door is open and the ignition is switched off, or if it is not in the  
P position when the ignition is switched off and the driver's door is opened, the  
following message will appear in the Information display: Move selector lever to  
position P! or, in the instrument cluster display: P. The message disappears af-  
ter a few seconds by switching on the ignition or by moving the selector lever into  
the position P.  
Automatic gearbox  
Information for driving with the 6-speed automatic gearbox  
The maximum speed is reached in the 5th gear. The 6th gear serves as an eco-  
nomic driving programme, which is intended to reduce the fuel consumption.  
Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically. You can also,  
however, switch the gearbox over into the Tiptronic mode. This mode makes it  
possible for you to also shift gears manually ⇒ꢀpage 129.  
Starting-off and Driving  
If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first nec-  
essary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling speed of  
the engine to be reached before engaging a drive position in the selector lever.  
Depress the brake pedal fully and keep it depressed.  
Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector lever), move the  
selector lever into the desired position, e.g. D ⇒ꢀpage 127, and then release  
the Shiftlock button.  
WARNING  
Wait a moment until the gearbox has shifted (a slight engagement nudge can  
be felt).  
Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the selector  
lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running - risk of accident!  
Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an  
accident!  
Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator ⇒ꢀ  
.
Stop  
When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is necessary to  
The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping just  
for a short time, such as at a cross roads. It is sufficient to hold the vehicle sta-  
tionary using the foot brake. The engine can, however, be allowed just to idle.  
hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever (ex-  
cept P and N) since the power transmission is never completely interrupted,  
also not when the engine is idling - the vehicle creeps.  
Parking  
Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.  
Information for driving with the automatic gearbox DSG  
Apply the handbrake firmly.  
The abbreviation DSG means Direct shift gearbox (Direct shift gear-  
box).  
Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the selector lever to P  
and then release the Shiftlock button.  
Two independent clutches are needed for the power transmission between the  
engine and the gearbox. These replace the torque converter of the conventional  
automatic gearbox. Their shifting is matched in such a way that there are no jerks  
when shifting the gear and the power transmission of the engine to the front  
wheels is not interrupted. You can also, however, switch the gearbox over into the  
Tiptronic mode. This mode makes it possible for you to also shift gears manually  
⇒ꢀpage 129.  
The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N . If the  
selector lever is not in the P or N positions when locking the steering, switching  
the ignition on or off or when leaving the engine on, the following message will  
appear in the Information display Move selector lever to position P/N! or, in the  
instrument cluster display: P/N.  
£
Automatic gearbox 127  
Starting-off and Driving  
WARNING  
Depress the brake pedal fully and keep it depressed.  
Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the selector  
lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running - risk of accident!  
Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an  
accident!  
Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector lever), move the  
selector lever into the desired position, e.g. D ⇒ꢀpage 127, and then release  
the Shiftlock button.  
Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator ⇒ꢀ  
.
If you are stopping at a hill (downhill section), never try to hold the car sta-  
tionary with the gear engaged by means of the “accelerator”, this means by  
letting the clutch slip. This can lead to overheating of the clutch. If there is a  
risk of overheating of the clutch due to overload, the clutch is opened auto-  
matically and the vehicle rolls backward - risk of accident!  
Stop  
The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping just  
for a short time, such as at a cross roads. It is absolutely sufficient to hold the  
stopped vehicle stationary by depressing the foot brake. The engine can, how-  
ever, be allowed just to idle.  
If you must stop at a slope, depress and hold the brake pedal, so that you  
can prevent the vehicle from rolling back.  
Parking  
CAUTION  
Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.  
The double clutch on the automatic gearbox DSG is equipped with an overload  
protection. If you make use of the uphill function on a vehicle which is stationary  
or driving slowly uphill, it will result in an increase of thermal stress of the clutch-  
es.  
Apply the handbrake firmly.  
Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the selector lever to P  
and then release the Shiftlock button.  
In the event that they overheat, the symbol appears in the information dis-  
The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N . If the  
selector lever is not in the P or N positions when locking the steering, switching  
the ignition on or off or when leaving the engine on, the following message will  
appear in the Information display Move selector lever to position P/N! or, in the  
instrument cluster display: P/N. At temperatures below -10 °C the engine can  
only be started in the selector lever position P.  
play with the warning text ⇒ꢀpage 31. In such a case bring the vehicle to a stop,  
switch off the engine and wait until the warning light and the warning go out -  
risk of gearbox damage! You can continue the trip as soon as the symbol and the  
warning go out.  
Selector lever positions  
It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat surface.  
When parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake firmly and then  
move the selector lever into position P. This is to ensure that there is no excessive  
pressure acting on the lock mechanism and that it is easier to subsequently move  
the selector lever out of position P. If the selector lever is not in the P positin  
when the driver's door is open and the ignition is switched off, or if it is not in the  
P position when the ignition is switched off and the driver's door is opened, the  
following message will appear in the Information display: Move selector lever to  
position P! or, in the instrument cluster display: P. The message disappears af-  
ter a few seconds by switching on the ignition or by moving the selector lever into  
the position P.  
If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first nec-  
essary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling speed of  
the engine to be reached before engaging a drive position in the selector lever.  
Fig. 127 Selector lever/information display: Selector lever positions  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
128 Automatic gearbox  
S
The current selector lever position is indicated in the information display of the in-  
- Position for sporty style of driving  
strument cluster ⇒ꢀfig. 127 - right.  
Shifting up later into a higher gear makes it possible to fully exploit the power po-  
tential of the engine. The gearbox also then shifts down at higher engine speeds  
as in the position D.  
P
- Parklock  
The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position.  
The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the selec-  
tor lever out of the position D into the position S.  
The Parklock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary ⇒ꢀ  
.
If you wish to move the selector lever into or out of this position, you must press  
the Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and at the same time de-  
press the brake pedal.  
WARNING  
Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an  
If the battery is used, the selector lever cannot be moved out of the position P.  
accident!  
When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is necessary to  
R
- Reverse gear  
Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine  
idling ⇒ꢀ  
hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever (ex-  
cept P and N) since the power transmission is never completely interrupted,  
also not when the engine is idling - the vehicle creeps.  
.
The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock must be  
You must on no account unintentionally operate the throttle (e.g. by hand  
pressed, if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions R, P or N.  
from the engine compartment) if a drive position is engaged when the car is  
stationary. The vehicle would otherwise immediately start off - also when the  
handbrake is firmly applied - risk of an accident!  
When the ignition is switched on and the selector lever is in position R, the re-  
verse lights will come on.  
You must move the selector lever into position P and firmly apply the  
N
- Neutral  
handbrake first before you or any other person opens the bonnet and starts  
working on the engine when it is running - risk of accident! It is also essential  
to observe all warnings ⇒ꢀpage 198, Working in the engine compartment.  
The transmission is in Neutral in this position.  
The brake pedal must be depressed (if the lever is in its position for longer than 2  
seconds) in order to move the selector lever out of the position N into the position  
D or R, with the ignition switched on, on a vehicle travelling at less than 5 km/  
hour or on a stationary vehicle.  
Selector lever lock  
Automatic selector lever lock   
D
- Position for driving forward  
With the ignition on, the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions P and  
N. You must first of all depress the brake pedal in order to move the selector lever  
out of this position. The warning light ⇒ꢀpage 22 lights up in the instrument  
cluster as a reminder for the driver when the selector lever is in the positions P  
and N.  
When the selector lever is in this position, the forward gears are shifted up and  
down automatically in line with engine load, vehicle speed and the dynamic shift  
programme.  
You must depress the brake pedal ⇒ꢀ if you wish to move the selector lever into  
position D from N when the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km/hour or is sta-  
tionary.  
A time delay element ensures that the selector lever is not blocked when rapidly  
switching over the position N (e.g. from R to D). This does, for example, allow one  
to seesaw out a stuck vehicle. The selector lever lock will click into place if the lev-  
er is in the N position for more than 2 seconds without the brake pedal being  
pressed.  
In certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountainous regions or when tow-  
ing a trailer) it may be beneficial to select the manual shift programme  
⇒ꢀpage 129 for a short time in order to adapt the gearbox ratios manually to the  
driving situations.  
£
Automatic gearbox 129  
The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving at speed  
of less than 5 km/hour. The lock is switched off automatically into position N  
when the car is travelling at a higher speed.  
Adopting a moderate style of driving will cause the gearbox to select the most  
economical driving programme. Shifting up into a higher gear as soon as possible  
and shifting down as late as possible will have a favourable effect on your fuel  
consumption.  
Shiftlock button  
Adopting a sporty style of driving with rapid movements of the accelerator pedal  
combined with sharp acceleration and frequent changes in speed, exploiting the  
top speed of the car or depressing the accelerator pedal (kickdown function), will  
cause the gearbox to switch over to this style of driving and shift down earlier  
with frequent changes in gears in comparison to the moderate style of driving.  
The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain selector lever  
positions being engaged inadvertently. The selector lever lock is cancelled when  
you press the Shiftlock button.  
Keylock - Ignition key withdrawal lock  
Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style of driv-  
ing is a continuous process. Irrespective of this it is, however, possible to switch or  
shift down into a dynamic shift programme by depressing the accelerator rapidly.  
The gearbox shifts down into a lower gear matching the speed of the car and this  
allows you to accelerate rapidly (e.g. when overtaking) without having to depress  
the accelerator pedal fully into the kickdown range. The original programme will  
be reactivated to match your particular style of driving once the gearbox has shif-  
ted up again.  
You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the selec-  
tor lever is in position P. If the ignition key is withdrawn, the selector lever is  
blocked in position P.  
Kickdown function  
The kickdown function provides you with maximum acceleration  
power.  
When driving in hilly regions, the gears are selected to match uphill and downhill  
sections. This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down when negotiat-  
ing an uphill stretch. When driving downhill, it is possible to shift down into the  
Fully depressing the accelerator pedal allows the kickdown function to be activa-  
ted in the desired driving program. This function has precedence over the driving  
programme and serves for maximum acceleration of the vehicle when exploiting  
the maximum power potential of the engine without taking into account the cur-  
rent selector lever position (D, S or Tiptronic). The gearbox shifts down to one or  
several gears in line with the driving state and the vehicle accelerates. The gear-  
box does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maxi-  
mum revolutions for this gear range.  
Tiptronic position, in order to exploit the engine brake torque.  
Tiptronic  
The Tiptronic allows the driver to also shift gears manually.  
WARNING  
Please note that using the kickdown function can result in the driven wheels  
spinning on a smooth or slippery road surface - risk of skidding!  
Dynamic shift programme  
The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically. Shifting up and  
down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of pre-defined  
driving programmes.  
Fig. 128 Selector lever: manual shifting/information display: Manual shifting of gears  
The selector lever position you have engaged is indicated in the information dis-  
play of the instrument cluster together with the engaged gear ⇒ꢀfig. 128 - right.  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
130 Automatic gearbox  
Switching over to manual shifting  
Shifting down gears  
Press the left rocker switch ⇒ꢀfig. 129 for the multifunction steering wheel.  
-
Push the selector lever to the right out of position D. After switching over, the  
current engaged gear is indicated in the display.  
Temporarily switching over to manual shifting  
Shifting up gears  
One-touch forward of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position) ⇒ꢀfig. 128  
-
If the selector lever is in position D or S, press the left rocker switch or the  
right rocker switch for the multifunction steering wheel.  
+
+
.
-
+
If the rocker switches or are not pressed for some time, the manual shift-  
ing switches off. You can also switch off the temporary switch over to manual  
Shifting down gears  
One-touch back of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position)  
-
.
+
shifting by pressing the right rocker switch for more than 1 second.  
It is possible to switch over to manual both when the car is stationary and also  
when driving.  
Emergency programme  
When you accelerate, the gearbox shifts up automatically into the higher gear just  
before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached.  
An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in the sys-  
tem.  
If you select a lower gear, the automatic gearbox does not shift down until there  
is no risk of the engine overrevving.  
The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there are func-  
tional faults in the gearbox electronics. This is indicated by all of the segments in  
the display lighting up or going out.  
If you operate the kickdown function, the gearbox shifts into a lower gear in line  
with the vehicle speed and engine speed.  
A functional fault can have the following effect:  
Manual shifting on the multifunction steering wheel  
The gearbox only shifts into certain gears.  
The reverse gear R cannot be used.  
The manual shift programme (Tiptronic) is switched off in the emergency  
mode.  
Note  
If the gearbox has switched over to emergency mode, drive to the nearest special-  
ist garage in order to have the fault rectified.  
Fig. 129 Multifunction steering wheel:  
Manual shifting of gears  
Switching over to manual shifting  
Push the selector lever to the right out of position D. After switching over, the  
current engaged gear is indicated in the display.  
Shifting up gears  
Press the right rocker switch ⇒ꢀfig. 129 for the multifunction steering wheel.  
+
Automatic gearbox 131  
Selector lever-emergency unlocking (DSG)  
Fig. 130 Selector lever-emergency unlocking  
In case of interruption of the power supply (e.g. flat vehicle battery, defective  
fuse) or defect of the selector lever lock, the selector lever can no longer be shif-  
ted from the position P in the normal way and the vehicle can no longer be moved.  
The selector lever must be unlocked in case of emergency.  
Apply the handbrake firmly.  
A
Grasp the selector lever cover at the points of the arrows  
and carefully pull  
it upwards ⇒ꢀfig. 130.  
The cover can also be unlocked on the other side.  
B
Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in direction of arrow  
.
Simultaneously press the shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever  
and shift the lever into the position N (if the selector lever is shifted again into  
the position P, it is once again blocked).  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
132 Communication  
Communication  
Multifunction steering wheel  
Operate radio and radio navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel  
You can of course operate the radio and radio navigation system at the appliance.  
You will find a description in the relevant Owner's manual.  
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel  
are illuminated.  
The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio or radio  
navigation system.  
£
By pressing or turning the buttons, you can carry out the following functions.  
Fig. 131 Multifunction steering wheel:  
control buttons  
The buttons for setting the basic functions of the factory-fitted radio and radio  
navigation system are located on the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ꢀfig. 131.  
Communication 133  
Button  
Action  
Radio, traffic information  
CD/CD changer/MP3  
Navigation  
a)  
1
press briefly  
Switch off/on tone/activation and deactivation of the voice control  
press button for a  
long period of time  
1
switch off/on  
1
1
turn upwards  
Increase volume  
Decrease volume  
turn downwards  
Changing to the next stored radio station  
Changing to the next stored traffic information  
Interrupting the traffic report  
2
2
3
3
press briefly  
Changing to the next title  
Fast forward  
press button for a  
Interruption of the traffic report  
long time  
Changing to the previously stored radio station  
Changing to the previously stored traffic information  
Interrupting the traffic report  
press briefly  
Changing to the previous title  
Fast rewind  
press button for a  
Interruption of the traffic report  
long time  
4
5
6
press briefly  
press briefly  
press briefly  
Changing the audio source  
Call up the main menu  
Interruption of the traffic report  
without function  
Display of the stored/accessible stations  
scroll upwards  
6
6
turn upwards  
Changing to the previous title  
Interruption of the traffic report  
without  
function  
Display of the stored/accessible stations  
scroll downwards  
turn downwards  
Changing to the next title  
Interruption of the traffic report  
a)  
Valid for the radio navigation system Columbus.  
ŠKOSA permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio systems with a  
professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission power of up  
to 10 watts.  
Note  
The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of the radio  
and radio navigation system of 4x 20 W.  
It is essential that you inform a specialist garage about the possibilites to assem-  
ble and operate mobile phones and two-way radio sets which have a power out-  
put of more than 10 W. They will inform you which technical possibilities exist for  
retrofitting mobile phones.  
For the equipment sound system, the loudspeakers are matched to a power  
output of the amplifier of 4x50°W + 6x25 W.  
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems  
When using a mobile phone inside the vehicle, which is not inserted into the  
phone adapter, and thus has no connection to the external aerial, the electromag-  
netic radiation can exceed the current limit value. If a suitable adapter is available  
£
The installation of a mobile phone and two-way radio system in a vehicle should  
be carried out by a specialist garage.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
134 Communication  
for your mobile phone, use your mobile phone exclusively in the adapter so that  
the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum. This also improves the quality of  
the connection.  
All communication between a telephone and the hands-free system of your vehi-  
cle can only be established with the help of the Bluetooth technology. The  
adapter serves only for charging the telephone and for transmitting the signal to  
the external aerial of the vehicle.  
®
Operation of mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with func-  
tioning of the electronic systems of your vehicle.  
To ensure an optimum signal transmission, always leave the telephone with the  
adapter in the telephone mount.  
The reasons for this may be:  
Furthermore the volume can be changed individually during the call at any time  
with the button for setting the radio or radio navigation system or with the but-  
tons on the multifunction steering wheel.  
no external aerial,  
external aerial incorrectly installed,  
transmission power greater than 10 watts.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Concentrate fully at all times on your steering! As the driver you are fully re-  
sponsible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent, so  
that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time.  
If a mobile phone or a two-way radio system is operated in the vehicle  
without using an external aerial or an external aerial which has been incor-  
rectly installed, this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field in  
the interior of the vehicle.  
Note  
Please concentrate fully at all times on your driving!  
Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ꢀpage 133, Mobile phones and two-  
way radio systems.  
Should you have any questions, please contact an authorised ŠKODA Service  
You must not install two-way radio systems, mobile phones or mounts on  
the covers of the airbags or within the immediate deployment range of air-  
bags. This might result in injuries to the occupants in the event of an accident.  
Partner.  
Never leave a mobile phone on a seat, on the dash panel or in another  
area, from which it can be thrown during a sudden braking manoeuvre, an ac-  
cident or a collision. In this case, the occupants of the vehicle might be injured.  
Phone Phonebook  
A phone phonebook is part of the mobile phone preinstallation with voice control.  
In the phone phonebook there are 2500 free memory locations available. Each  
contact can contain up to 4 numbers. This phone phonebook can be used in line  
with the mobile telephone.  
Note  
Observe the country-specific regulations for the use of mobile phones in vehicles.  
On vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Columbus, a maximum of 1200  
telephone contacts are shown in the display of this appliance.  
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II  
After the first connection of the telephone, the system begins to load the phone  
book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit.  
Introduction  
Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands-free  
system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating can  
take a few minutes. During this time the phone book, which was stored after the  
last update was completed, is available. Newly stored telephone numbers are only  
shown after the updating has ended.  
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II is a built-in “hands-free system”, it  
provides a voice operated convenience mode via the multifunction steering wheel  
or the radio navigation system.  
£
If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500, the phone book is not complete.  
Communication 135  
If a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call, dialogue of the voice control)  
occurs during the updating procedure, the updating is interrupted. After the tele-  
phone event has ended, the updating starts anew.  
Up to four mobile phones can be paired to the hands-free system, whereby only  
one mobile phone can communicate with the hands-free system.  
Connection with an already paired mobile phone  
After switching on the ignition, the connection is automatically established for the  
already paired mobile phone . Check on the mobile unit if the automatic connec-  
Connection of the mobile phone with the hands-free system  
1 )  
tion was established.  
In order to connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, it is necessary to  
connect the telephone to the hands-free system. Detailed information on this is  
provided in the operating instructions of your mobile phone. The following steps  
must be carried out for the connection:  
Disconnecting the connection  
By withdrawing the ignition key.  
By disconnecting the device in the information display.  
By disconnecting the device in the mobile phone.  
®
Activate the Bluetooth in your telephone and the visibility of the mobile  
phone.  
Solving connection problems  
Switch on the ignition.  
If the system announces No paired phone found, check the operating state of the  
telephone.  
Select the menu Phone - Phone search in the information display and wait un-  
til the control unit has ended the search.  
Is the telephone switched on?  
Is the PIN code entered?  
Is Bluetooth active?  
Is the visibility of the mobile phone active?  
Was the telephone already paired with the hands-free system?  
Select your mobile phone in the menu of the units found.  
Confirm the PIN (as standard 1234).  
®
If the hands-free system announces (as standard Skoda UHV) on the display of  
the mobile phone, enter the PIN (as standard 1234) within 30 seconds and wait  
1)  
until the connection is established.  
After ending the connection, confirm in the information display that a new  
user profile was created.  
WARNING  
®
In the event of air transport, the Bluetooth function of the hands-free sys-  
tem must be switched off by a specialist garage!  
If no more free space is available for creating a new user profile, delete an existing  
user profile.  
Note  
If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands-free sys-  
tem within 3 minutes after switching on the ignition, switch the ignition off and  
then again on. The visibility of the hands-free system is established again for 3  
minutes. The visibility of the Bluetooth device is automatically switched off if the  
vehicle starts off or if the mobile phone connects to the device.  
®
Not valid for all mobile phones which enable a communication via Bluetooth .  
You can ask at an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner if your telephone is compati-  
ble with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II.  
®
If a suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone, use your mobile phone  
exclusively in the adapter so that the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum.  
£
During the connecting procedure, no other mobile phone may be connected with  
the hands-free system.  
1)  
®
Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorization for establishing a Bluetooth connec-  
tion is performed via the input of a code. If the input for the authorization is necessary, it must al-  
ways be performed when re-establishing the Bluetooth connection.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
136 Communication  
Inserting the mobile phone into the adapter ensures an optimal sending and  
CAUTION  
receiving power and offers at the same time the advantage of the battery charg-  
Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to interrup-  
tion of the connection. When taking out the mobile phone, the connection to the  
factory-fitted antenna is interrupted, this reduces the quality of the transmitting  
and receiving signal. The charging of the mobile phone battery is also interrupted.  
ing.  
®
The range of the Bluetooth connection to the hands-free system is restricted  
to the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obstacles be-  
tween the devices and mutual interferences with other devices. If your mobile  
phone is e.g. in a jacket pocket, this can lead to difficulties when establishing the  
®
Operating telephone calls with the aid of the adapter.  
Bluetooth connection with the hands-free system or the data transfer.  
Inserting the mobile phone and adapter  
Fig. 133 Illustration image: Single-button adapter/two-button adapter  
Fig. 132 Universal preparation for the  
mobile phone  
Function overview of the  
(PTT - “push to talk”) button on the adapter ⇒ꢀfig. 133:  
Activating/deactivating voice control  
Reject/end a call  
Only one telephone mount is factory-fitted. An adapter for the telephone can be  
purchased from the range of the ŠKODA Original Accessories.  
SOS  
On some adapters, aside from the  
button, the  
⇒ꢀfig. 133 button also ap-  
Inserting the mobile phone and adapter  
pears- on the right. After pressing the button for 2 seconds, the number 112  
(Emergency call) is dialed.  
A
First of all push the adapter  
in the direction of arrow ⇒ꢀfig. 132 up to the  
stop into the mount. Press the adapter slightly downwards, until it locks se-  
curely into position.  
Note  
The adapters illustrated are only prime examples.  
A
Insert the mobile phone into the adapter  
structions).  
(as specified in manufacturer's in-  
SOS  
and  
On vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Columbus, the  
buttons do not operate.  
Removing the mobile phone and adapter  
Press simultaneously the side locks of the mount ⇒ꢀfig. 132 and remove the  
mobile phone and adapter .  
Communication 137  
Operation of the telephone on the multifunction steering wheel  
This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the telephone preinstalla-  
tion at the factory.  
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel  
are illuminated.  
Overview of the different functions in contrast to the multifunction steering  
wheel without mobile phone operation ⇒ꢀpage 132.  
Fig. 134 Multifunction steering wheel:  
Mobile phone operation  
The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply operating the  
buttons located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic  
situation without being distracted as little as possible by operating the telephone  
⇒ꢀfig. 134.  
Button  
Action  
Operation  
Activation and deactivation of the voice control (Button PTT - Push to talk)  
Cancellation of the played message  
1
press briefly  
1
1
turn upwards  
turn downwards  
press briefly  
Increase volume  
Decrease volume  
2
Accept call, end call, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of the dialed numbers, call the dialed contact  
press button for a long  
2
3
3
4
4
Reject call, private call  
Reach one level higher in the menu (according to the current position in the menu)  
Leave the phone menu  
time  
press briefly  
press button for a long  
time  
press briefly  
Selection of menu point  
press button for a long peri-  
od of time  
To the next initial letter in the telephone book  
4
4
4
4
turn upwards  
turn downwards  
The last chosen menu selection, name  
The next menu selection, name  
quickly turn upwards  
quickly turn downwards  
To the previous initial letter in the telephone book  
£
To the next initial letter in the telephone book  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
138 Communication  
The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current tele-  
phone.  
Bluetooth  
In the menu Bluetooth you can select the following menu points:  
User - the overview of the stored users  
Operate the telephone via the information display  
New user - Search for new telephones which are in the reception range  
Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the telephone unit for other devices  
In the menu Phone you can select the following menu points:  
Media player  
Phone book  
Dial number  
Call register  
Active device  
Paired devices  
Search  
1)  
Voice mailbox  
Phone name - the possibility to change the name of the telephone unit (pre-  
set SKODA UHV)  
1 )  
Bluetooth  
Settings  
2)  
Settings  
Back  
In the menu Settings you can select the following menu points:  
Phone book  
Phone book  
1 )  
In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the tele-  
phone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone.  
Update  
List  
Surname  
First name  
Dial number  
In the menu point Dial number, you can write any telephone number. Select in se-  
quence the desired digits with the aid of the handwheel and confirm it by pressing  
the handwheel. You can choose the numbers 0 - 9, symbols , , # and the func-  
tions Cancel, Call, Delete.  
Ring tone  
Back  
Return in the basic menu of the telephone.  
Call register  
In the menu point Call register, you can select the following menu points:  
Missed calls  
Dialled numbers  
Received calls  
Voice mailbox  
1 )  
In the menu Voice mailbox, it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox  
and then dial the number.  
1)  
On vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Amundsen+, this function can be accessed via  
the menu of the radio navigation system, see the operating instructions for the Amundsen+.  
2)  
This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Amundsen+.  
Communication 139  
Switching off voice control (dialogue)  
Voice control  
If the system is currently playing a message, you will need to end the message  
currently being played:  
Dialogue  
1)  
by briefly pressing the  
button on the adapter  
;
On vehicles which are factory-fitted with the navigation system Co-  
lumbus, it is only possible to operate the voice control via this de-  
vice, see the operating instructions for Columbus.  
1
by pressing the  
button on the multi-function steering wheel for a longer  
time.  
If the system expects a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself:  
Do some with the CANCEL voice command;  
The period of time in which the system is ready to receive voice commands and to  
carry them out is called a dialogue. The system gives audible feedback and guides  
you if necessary through the relevant functions.  
1)  
by pressing the  
button on the adapter ;  
1
by pressing the  
button on the multi-function steering wheel for a longer  
time.  
Optimum understanding of the commands depends on several factors:  
Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses.  
Avoid a bad pronunciation.  
Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, in order to reduce or stop disturbing  
Note  
The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted.  
The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multi-function steer-  
exterior noise.  
It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone of your  
voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise.  
During the dialogue limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. simultaneously  
talking occupants.  
ing wheel with telephone control or a phone holder and adapter.  
Voice commands  
Basic voice commands for operating the telephone control unit  
Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement.  
Voice command  
HELP  
Action  
The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and di-  
After this command the system repeats all possible  
commands.  
rected to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front pas-  
senger can operate the equipment.  
With this command you call up the contact from the  
phone book ⇒ꢀpage 140.  
After this command, for example the phone book can  
be repeated, a voice entry for the contact can be up-  
dated or deleted etc.  
If a voice command is not detected, the system answers with “Sorry?” and a new  
entry can be performed. After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid. After the  
3rd error the answer “Procedure cancelled” is given and the dialogue is ended.  
CALL XYZ  
PHONE BOOK  
CALL HISTORY  
DIAL NUMBER  
Switch on voice control (dialogue)  
1)  
by briefly pressing the  
button on the adapter ⇒ꢀfig. 133;  
Lists of dialed numbers, missed calls etc.  
1
by pressing the  
button on the multi-function steering wheel for a longer  
After this command a phone number can be entered  
which establishes a connection to the requested par-  
ty.  
time ⇒ꢀpage 137.  
After this command the system selects the last se-  
lected number.  
REDIAL  
£
1)  
Not valid for vehicles which are fitted with the radio navigation system Columbus.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
140 Communication  
Voice command  
®
Action  
Music playback via Bluetooth  
Play music from the mobile phone or another paired  
device.  
a)  
MUSIC  
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl makes it possible to play back mu-  
sic via Bluetooth from the devices such as MP3 player, mobile phone or note-  
®
After this command the system offers additional con-  
text-dependent commands.  
FURTHER OPTIONS  
book.  
®
®
In order to enable the music playback via Bluetooth , it is necessary to connect  
SETTINGS  
Selection for setting Bluetooth , dialogue etc.  
the terminal device with the hands-free system in the menu Phone - Bluetooth -  
Media player.  
CANCEL  
The dialogue is ended.  
a)  
On vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Amundsen+, this function can be accessed via  
the menu of the radio navigation system, see the operating instructions for the Amundsen+.  
The operation of the music playback from the connected device can be performed  
via the hands-free system with the voice control ⇒ꢀpage 139, Voice commands or  
directly via the connected device.  
After giving the command DIAL NUMBER, the system requests the entry of a tele-  
phone number. You can enter the telephone number as a continuous row, as indi-  
vidually spoken digits (the whole number at once) or in the form of digital blocks  
(separated by short pauses). After each order of digits (separation through brief  
voice pause) all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system.  
Note  
®
The device to be connected must support the Bluetooth profile A2DP, see Own-  
er's manual of the device to be coupled.  
The digits 0 - 9, symbols +, , # are permitted. The system detects no continuous  
digit combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken digits (two,  
three).  
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl  
Call name  
Introduction  
Switch on the voice operation ⇒ꢀpage 139.  
Give the command CALL XYZ after the signal tone.  
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM III is a built-in “hands-free system”, it  
provides a voice operated convenience mode via the multifunction steering wheel  
or the radio navigation system.  
Example for calling the name from the phone book  
The following functions are included in the universal telephone preinstallation  
GSM III.  
Voice command  
CALL XYZ  
Announcement  
Say home, work, mobile”  
XYZ work is dialed.”  
XYZ work is dialed.”  
Phone Phonebook ⇒ꢀpage 141.  
e.g. WORK  
Convenience mode with the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ꢀpage 143 and dis-  
play in the information display ⇒ꢀpage 144.  
CALL XYZ WORK  
Voice control of the telephone, including the language selection of the tele-  
Store voice recording of a contact  
phone contacts ⇒ꢀpage 146.  
Internet connection ⇒ꢀpage 147.  
If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you will  
can choose to save your own voice entry for the contact in the menu point Phone  
book - Voice Tag - Record.  
Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units ⇒ꢀpage 147.  
Display of SMS ⇒ꢀpage 144.  
You can also store your own voice entry using voice control in the menu FURTHER  
OPTIONS.  
All communication between a telephone and the hands-free system of your vehi-  
cle can only be established with the help of the following profiles of Bluetooth  
®
£
technology.  
Communication 141  
rSAP - Remote SIM access profile  
If the telephone book of the mobile phone contains more than 2 000 entries, the  
system announces Phone book not fully loaded.  
After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile,  
the telephone deregisters from the GSM network, the control unit ensures the  
communication with the network via the internal antenna. In the telephone only  
Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands-free  
system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating can  
take a few minutes. During this time the phone book, which was stored after the  
last update was completed, is available. Newly stored telephone numbers are only  
shown after the updating has ended.  
®
the interface for Bluetooth remains active. In this case, you can only separate  
®
from the control unit, switch off the Bluetooth connection or select the number  
of the emergency call 112 (only valid for some countries).  
If a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call, dialogue of the voice control)  
occurs during the updating procedure, the updating is interrupted. After the tele-  
phone event has ended, the updating starts anew.  
HFP - Hands Free Profile  
After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HFP profile,  
the telephone continues to use its GMS module and internal antenna to communi-  
cate with the GSM network.  
Connection of the telephone with the hands-free system  
WARNING  
In order to connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, it is necessary to  
connect the telephone to the hands-free system. Detailed information on this is  
provided in the operating instructions of your mobile phone. The following steps  
must be carried out for the connection.  
Concentrate fully at all times on your steering! As the driver you are fully re-  
sponsible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent, so  
that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time.  
Note  
Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HFP profile  
The volume can be changed individually during the call at any time with the  
button for setting the radio or radio navigation system or with the buttons on the  
multifunction steering wheel.  
®
Activate the Bluetooth in your telephone and the visibility of the mobile  
phone.  
Switch on the ignition.  
Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ꢀpage 133, Mobile phones and two-  
way radio systems.  
Should you have any questions, please contact an authorised ŠKODA Service  
Select the menu Phone - Phone search in the information display and wait un-  
til the control unit has ended the search.  
Partner.  
Select your mobile phone in the menu of the units found.  
Within 30 seconds enter the 16 digit PIN of your control unit as indicated in the  
information display and confirm it according to the instructions on the display  
of your telephone.  
Phone Phonebook  
A phone phonebook is part of the mobile phone preinstallation with voice control.  
In the phone phonebook there are 2000 free memory locations available. Each  
contact can contain up to 5 numbers. This phone phonebook can be used in line  
with the mobile telephone.  
To store a new user or to download the telephone book and the identification  
data of the SIM card into the control unit, follow the instructions in the infor-  
mation display and on the mobile phone.  
Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile  
On vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Columbus, a maximum of 1000  
telephone contacts are shown in the display of this appliance.  
®
Activate the Bluetooth in your telephone and the visibility of the mobile  
phone. For certain mobile phones it is necessary to switch on first the rSAP  
function.  
After the first connection of the telephone, the system begins to load the phone  
book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit.  
£
Switch on the ignition.  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
142 Communication  
Select the menu Phone - Phone search in the information display and wait un-  
til the control unit has ended the search.  
On vehicles which are fitted out with radio or radio navigation system at the fac-  
tory, it is possible to terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the  
ignition lock by pressing the icon on the touch-screen of the radio or the radio  
1)  
Select your mobile phone in the menu of the units found.  
navigation system, see operating instructions for radio or radio navigation system.  
Within 30 seconds enter the 16 digit PIN of your control unit as indicated in the  
information display and confirm it according to the instructions on the display  
of your telephone.  
WARNING  
Concentrate fully at all times on your steering! As the driver you are fully  
If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code, enter the PIN of the SIM card of your  
telephone. The telephone connects to the control unit (during the first con-  
nection you can only enter it in the information display and when the vehicle is  
stationary, since you can only choose whether the PIN should be stored in this  
situation).  
responsible for road safety. Only use the system so that you are in full control  
of your vehicle in every traffic situation - risk of accident!  
®
In the event of air transport, the Bluetooth function of the hands-free  
system must be switched off by a specialist garage!  
For the first storage of a new user follow the instructions in the information  
display.  
Note  
In the memory of the control unit, up to three users can be stored, whereby  
the hands-free system can only communicate actively with one user. In the case  
of mutual connection with a fourth mobile phone, you must erase one user.  
To download the telephone book and the indentification data of the SIM card  
into the new control unit, confirm again the command rSAP in your mobile  
phone.  
®
Not valid for all mobile phones which enable a communication via Bluetooth .  
You can ask at an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner if your telephone is compati-  
ble with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl.  
The telephone connects preferentially via the rSAP profile.  
If the PIN was stored, the telephone is automatically detected and connected with  
the hands-free system when the ignition is switched on the next time. Check on  
your mobile phone if it was automatically connected.  
When connecting to the control unit, follow the instructions on your mobile  
phone.  
The range of the Bluetooth connection to the hands-free system is intended  
®
for the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obstacles be-  
tween the devices and interferences with other devices.  
Disconnecting the connection  
The connection to the hands-free system is disconnected:  
When removing the key from the ignition lock (during a telephone call, the  
connection is disconnected).  
After disconnecting the connection in the telephone.  
After disconnecting the connection in the information display in the Bluetooth  
- User - Select user - Disconnect menu.  
1)  
Does not apply for Radio Swing.  
Communication 143  
Operation of the telephone on the multifunction steering wheel  
This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the telephone preinstalla-  
tion at the factory.  
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel  
are illuminated.  
Overview of the different functions in contrast to the multifunction steering  
wheel without mobile phone operation ⇒ꢀpage 132.  
Fig. 135 Multifunction steering wheel:  
Control buttons for the telephone  
The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply operating the  
buttons located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic  
situation without being distracted as little as possible by operating the telephone  
⇒ꢀfig. 135.  
Button  
Action  
Operation  
Activation and deactivation of the voice control (Button PTT - Push to talk)  
Cancellation of the played message  
1
press briefly  
1
1
turn upwards  
turn downwards  
press briefly  
Increase volume  
Decrease volume  
2
Accept call, end call, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of the dialed numbers, call the dialed contact  
press button for a long  
2
3
3
4
4
Reject call, list of the last calls, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of dialed numbers  
Reach one level higher in the menu (according to the current position in the menu)  
Leave the phone menu  
time  
press briefly  
press button for a long  
time  
press briefly  
Confirm menu selection  
press button for a long peri-  
od of time  
To the next initial letter in the telephone book  
4
4
4
4
turn upwards  
turn downwards  
The last chosen menu selection, name  
The next menu selection, name  
quickly turn upwards  
quickly turn downwards  
To the previous initial letter in the telephone book  
£
To the next initial letter in the telephone book  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
144 Communication  
The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current tele-  
phone.  
The following functions are available for each phone contact:  
Display telephone number  
Voice Tag  
Operate the telephone via the information display  
Replay  
Record  
If no telephone is connected with the hands-free system, after you select the  
Phone menu, the No paired phone found message will appear and the following  
menu points:  
Dial number  
In the menu point Dial number, you can write any telephone number. Select in se-  
quence the desired digits with the aid of the handwheel and confirm it by pressing  
the handwheel. You can select the numbers 0 - 9, the symbols +, , # and the  
functions Delete, Call, Back.  
Help this menu point appears when no paired phone is stored in the memory  
of the control unit.  
Connect this menu point appears when one or more paired phones are stored  
in the memory of the control unit.  
Phone search  
Media player  
Call register  
In the menu point Call register, you can select the following menu points:  
Missed calls  
Active device  
Received calls  
Paired devices  
Dialled numbers  
Search  
Delete lists  
Visibility  
SOS  
Voice mailbox  
In the menu Voice mailbox, it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox  
and then dial the number. Select in sequence the desired digits with the aid of the  
handwheel and confirm it by pressing the handwheel. You can select the numbers  
0 - 9, the symbol + and the functions Delete, Call, Save, and Back.  
If a telephone is coupled with the hands-free system, you can choose the follow-  
ing menu points in the Phone menu:  
Phone book  
Dial number  
Messages  
Call register  
Voice mailbox  
Messages  
Bluetooth  
Settings  
Back  
In the menu point Messages there is a list of received text messages. After calling  
a message, the following functions appear:  
1)  
Show  
Read - the system reads out the selected message through the vehicle's  
speakers  
Send time  
Callback  
Phone book  
In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the tele-  
phone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone.  
Copy - copies the incoming message to the SIM card  
Delete  
£
1)  
Only when connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile.  
Communication 145  
Bluetooth  
List  
Surname  
First name  
In the menu Bluetooth you can select the following menu points:  
User - the overview of the stored users  
Own number - optionally display your own telephone number on the display of  
the device of the person you are calling (this function is network-dependent)  
Connect  
Disconnect  
Rename  
Delete  
Network depnd. .  
Yes  
No  
New user - Search for users who are in the reception range  
Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devi-  
ces  
Media player  
Signal settings  
Ring tone  
Volume  
Turn vol. up  
Active device  
Paired devices  
Turn vol. down  
Phone settings  
Connect  
Select operator  
Rename  
Automatic  
Delete  
Manual  
Authorisation  
Network mode  
Search - search for available media players  
Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the media player hands-free sys-  
tem in the environment  
GSM  
Automatic  
SIM mode - valid for telephones with the rSAP profile, in which the opera-  
Extras  
tion of two SIM cards simultaneously is supported - you can choose which  
SIM card you want to associate with the hands-free system  
Modem - overview of the active and paired devices for the connection to  
the internet  
Change  
Active device  
Phone Mode - Toggle between rSAP and HFP mode  
Paired devices  
Premium - rSAP mode  
Phone name - the possibility to change the name of the hands-free system  
(pre-set SKODA UHV)  
Handsfree - HFP mode  
Off time - Setting in five-minute steps  
Data - Settings for the Internet access point - ask network operator for details  
Switch off ph. (Switch off ph.) - switches off the phone unit (phone remains  
Settings  
In the menu Settings you can select the following menu points:  
coupled)  
Phone book  
Update - scan the telephone book  
Select memory  
Back  
Return in the main menu of the information display.  
SIM & phone  
SIM card  
Mobile phone - Initial setting which allows contacts on the SIM card to  
be scanned, it is necessary to switch to the menu point SIM & phone  
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
146 Communication  
If the system expects a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself:  
Voice control  
Do some with the CANCEL voice command;  
1
by pressing the  
button on the multi-function steering wheel.  
Dialogue  
Note  
On vehicles which are factory-fitted with the navigation system Co-  
lumbus, it is only possible to operate the voice control via this de-  
vice, see the operating instructions for Columbus.  
The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted.  
Voice commands  
The period of time in which the system is ready to receive voice commands and to  
carry them out is called a dialogue. The system gives audible feedback and guides  
you if necessary through the relevant functions.  
Basic voice commands for operating the telephone control unit  
Voice command  
HELP  
Action  
Optimum understanding of the commands depends on several factors:  
After this command the system repeats all possible  
commands.  
Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses.  
Avoid a bad pronunciation.  
Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, in order to reduce or stop disturbing  
After this command a name can be entered which es-  
tablishes a connection to the requested partner.  
CALL NAME  
exterior noise.  
It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone of your  
voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise.  
During the dialogue limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. simultaneously  
talking occupants.  
After this command a phone number can be entered  
which establishes a connection to the requested par-  
ty.  
DIAL NUMBER  
REDIAL  
The last selected telephone number is selected.  
The system reads the contacts in the telephone  
book.  
READ ADDRESSBOOK  
Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement.  
The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and di-  
The system reads the messages which were received  
while the telephone was connected with the hands-  
free system.  
rected to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front pas-  
senger can operate the equipment.  
READ MESSAGES  
SHORT DIALOGUE  
Help is clearly reduced (good operating knowledge  
provided).  
Switch on voice control (dialogue)  
1
You can start the dialogue at any time by pressing the  
button on the multi-  
LONG DIALOGUE  
CANCEL  
Help is not reduced (suitable for beginners).  
The dialogue is ended.  
function steering wheel ⇒ꢀpage 143.  
If the system does not recognise your command, it repeats the first part of the aid  
and thus a new entry is possible. After the 2nd error the system repeats the sec-  
ond part of the aid. After the 3rd error the answer “Procedure cancelled” is given  
and the dialogue is ended.  
Store voice recording of a contact  
If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you will  
can choose to save your own voice entry for the contact in the menu point Phone  
book - Voice Tag - Record.  
Switching off voice control (dialogue)  
If the system is currently playing a message, you will need to end the message  
You can also store your own voice entry using voice control in the menu FURTHER  
OPTIONS.  
1
currently being played by pressing the  
wheel.  
button on the multi-function steering  
Communication 147  
The music playback process is performed on the connected device.  
Internet connection  
Note  
An Internet connection can be established via a PC or PDA.  
®
The device to be connected must support the Bluetooth profile A2DP, see Own-  
er's manual of the device to be coupled.  
The control unit on the hands-free system supports the GPRS, EDGE and UMTS/3G  
technologies.  
An Internet is only possible via a telephone which is connected via the rSAP pro-  
file.  
Multimedia  
The procedure for connecting to the Internet can vary depending on the type and  
version of the operating system as well as the type of the device to be connected.  
Successfully connecting to the internet requires appropriate knowledge of the op-  
erating system for connecting the device .  
AUX-IN and MDI inputs  
The input AUX-IN is located below the armrest of the front seats and is marked  
with .  
Process of connection  
The MDI input is located underneath the arm rest of the front passenger seat.  
Connect the mobile phone with the hands-free system.  
The inputs AUX-IN and MDI are used to connect external audio sources (e.g. iPod  
or MP3 player) and play back music from these devices via your factory-fitted radio  
or radio navigation system.  
Set the access point (depending on the operator, usually the “Internet”) in the  
menu Phone - Settings - Data .  
Switch on the visibility of the hands-free system for the other devices in the  
menu Phone - Bluetooth - Visibility.  
The description of the operation can be found in the relevant Owner's Manual of  
your radio or your radio navigation system.  
®
Have the device to be connected search for available Bluetooth devices.  
Note  
From the list of found devices, choose the hands-free system (“SKODA_BT” by  
default).  
The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of the radio  
and radio navigation system of 4x 20 W.  
For the equipment sound system, the loudspeakers are matched to a power  
On the device to be connected, enter the password and follow any instructions  
given on this device or in the information display.  
output of the amplifier of 4x50°W + 6x25 W.  
Enter the required Internet address in the browser. The operating system re-  
quests the entry of the telephone number for the internet access (depending  
on the operator, usually “*99#”).  
CD change  
®
Music playback via Bluetooth  
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl makes it possible to play back mu-  
®
sic via Bluetooth from the devices such as MP3 player, mobile phone or note-  
book.  
®
In order to enable the music playback via Bluetooth , it is necessary to first con-  
nect the device to be connected with the hands-free system in the menu Phone -  
Bluetooth - Media player.  
Fig. 136 The CD changer  
£
Using the system  
Safety  
Driving Tips  
General Maintenance  
Breakdown assistance  
Technical data  
148 Communication  
The CD changer for the radio and radio navigation system is located in the left  
side compartment of the luggage compartment.  
DVD-preinstallation  
Inserting the CD  
C
Touch the button  
⇒ꢀfig. 136 and guide the CD (compact disc) into the CD-  
B
case . The CD is automatically loaded onto the lowest free position in the CD  
D
changer. The LED in the corresponding button  
stops flashing.  
Fill CD changer with CDs  
C
Hold the button  
pressed for longer than 2 seconds and guide the CDs one  
B
after the other (maximum 6 CDs) into the CD case . The LEDs in the buttons  
D
are no longer flashing.  
Fig. 137 Seat backrest - left front seat/right front seat  
Description  
Inserting a CD to one definite position  
C
D
Briefly touch the button . The LEDs in the buttons  
light up at the memory  
spaces, which are already assigned and flash in the case of free memory  
spaces.  
A
B
C
Openings for attachment of DVD player holder  
Audio/video input  
Connection input, DVD player  
D
B
Touch the desired button  
and guide the CD into the CD-case  
.
Ejecting CD  
Only one DVD pre-installation is factory-installed in the seat backrest of the front  
seat.  
A
Briefly touch the button , in order to eject a CD. For assigned memory  
D
spaces, now the LEDs light up in the buttons  
.
The DVD player holder and DVD player can be purchased from the range of the  
ŠKODA Original Accessories. For a description of the controls, refer to the operat-  
ing instructions for these devices and equipment.  
D
Touch the corresponding button . The CD is ejected.  
Ejecting all CDs  
A
Hold the button  
pressed for more than 2 seconds, in order to eject the CDs.  
WARNING  
All CDs in the CD-changer are ejected consecutively.  
If there are passengers of both of the rear seats, the DVD player holder  
must not be used alone (without the DVD player) - risk of injury!  
The inclination of the holder can be adjusted to three preset positions.  
Risk of finger injuries between the holder and the backrest in case of changes  
in the position of the DVD player holder.  
Note  
B
Always guide the CD into the CD-case  
with the printed side pointing up-  
wards.  
Never push the CD with force into the CD-case as the insertion is performed  
automatically.  
Do not use the DVD player holder when the rear seat backrest or the rear  
seat is folded forward or has been removed completely.  
After loading a CD into the CD-changer, you must wait until the LED of the cor-  
D
B
responding button  
lights up. Then the CD-case  
is free to load the next CD.  
Note  
If you have selected a position, on which a CD is already located, this CD will be  
ejected. Take out the ejected CD and load the desired CD.  
Follow the instructions given in the operating instructions of the DVD player/DVD  
player holder.  

Related Topics

Popular Owner Manuals